Home

Nikon D3 manual

Contents

1. 7 The USB Cable Clip To prevent cable from being disconnected fasten the clip as shown 1 USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard 5 Turnthe camera on Power switch If Mass Storage is selected for USB pg 257 P E will be displayed in the control panels and viewfinder and the PC connection indicator will flash in the top control panel camera displays do not change if MTP PTP is selected MHL 6 Transfer photographs Transfer photographs to the computer as described in the online help for Nikon Transfer To view the online help start Nikon Transfer and select Nikon Transfer help from the Nikon Transfer Help menu m During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress 259 260 7 Turn the camera off If MTP PTP is selected for USB the camera can be turned off and the USB cable disconnected once transfer is complete If Mass Storage is selected the camera must first be removed from the system as described below Windows Vista Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon _ in the taskbar and select Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device from the menu that appears Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional Click the Safel
2. Format memory card 345 LCD brightness 345 Lock mirror up for cleaning 395 Video mode 346 HDMI 346 World time 347 Language 347 Image comment 348 Auto image rotation 349 Voice memo 248 Voice memo overwrite 249 Voice memo button 249 Audio output 254 USB 350 Dust off ref photo 351 Battery info 353 Wireless transmitter 2 261 Image authentication 354 Save load settings 355 GPS 223 Virtual horizon 357 Non CPU lens data 220 AF fine tune 358 Firmware version 359 1 Not available when battery is low 2 Only available when optional WT 4 wireless transmitter is connected and MTP PTP selected for USB pg 350 344 Format Memory Card Format the card in the selected slot Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card Before formatting be sure to make backup copies as required m During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting Two Button Format Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the s tt and MODE buttons for about two seconds pg 45 LCD Brightness Press A or W to choose from seven settings Pome for monitor brightness Choose higher values for increased brightness lower values for reduced brightness Lock Mirror up for Cleaning Lock the mirror in the up position to allow inspection or manual cleaning of the low pass filter that protects the camera image sensor pg 395 345 346 Video Mo
3. Landscape wide Camera rotated 90 orientation clockwise counter clockwise Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected Choose this option when taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down Rotate Tall To automatically rotate tall portrait orientation photographs for display during playback select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu pg 287 Voice Memo The voice memo menu contains options for recording voice memos during shooting See Voice Memos Recording Voice Memos pg 248 349 350 Voice Memo Overwrite This option determines whether the voice memo for the last photograph recorded can be overwritten when the camera is in shooting mode See Voice Memos Recording Voice Memos pg 249 Voice Memo Button This option controls the operation of the button See Voice Memos Recording Voice Memos pg 249 Audio Output Choose output options for voice memo playback See Voice Memos Playing Voice Memos pg 254 USB Choose a USB option for connection to a computer or PictBridge printer Choose MTP PTP the default setting when connecting to a PictBridge printer or an optional WT 4 wireless transmitter or when using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately see page 387 See page 257 for information on selecting a USB option for use with Nikon Transfer supplied Dust off Ref Photo Acquire reference data fo
4. PD AP R SI 5 F5 1At oe MODE 1 SO 00 COLOR Space p EA EXP TUNIN PICTURE CNTRL Staton FOCAL LENGTH See LENS 85 JESS 3 AF VR i CONTRAST t FLASH MODE E BRIGHTNESS oe A BNA NIKON D3 Shooting Data page 1 Shooting Data page 2 shooting Data page 3 231 HE File Information 17 16 13 15 12 2007 10 76 00 5 3 By 1142567832 14 13 12 11 10 1 Voice MEMO ICON uu eessseesssees 248 10 IMAGE SIZE wee eecssessseessstesseeesseees 69 2 Protect status 244 11 Image area 60 3 Retouch indicator 360 12 Image authentication 354 A FOCUS point eeeeeesescccecensseeseess 282 13 Time of recording 39 5 Image highlights 2 282 14 Date of recording s 39 6 AF area brackets 47 95 15 Slot NUMDEL cceccsesssesssesseesseeeee 42 7 Frame number 16 Folder name eeccssscssseseeeseeees 293 total number of frames 17 File NAME sssssvs11111111111111011111 296 8 Highlight display indicator 282 9 Image quality usec 65 1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Display mode pg 282 a 2 Image highlights areas of the frame that may be overexposed are indicated by a flashing border Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode pg 282 3 is displayed if DX format 24 x 16 was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu 4 if 5 4 30 x 24 was selected No i
5. BE Setup Menu Options The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below e Auto meter off Choose whether or not the exposure meters will turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached Option Description Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2 Enable Auto meter off delay This reduces the drain on the default battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded if the shutter release button is pressed all the way down without pausing Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is connected GPS data will always be recorded Disable e Position This item is only available if a GPS device is connected when it displays the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading as reported by the GPS device Heading The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is equipped with a digital compass Keep the GPS device pointing in the same direction as the lens and at least 20 cm 8 in from the camera Coordinated Universal Time UTC UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock 225 226 More About Playback Playback Options This chapter describes how to play back photographs and details the operations that can be performed during playback Full Frame Playback ssccsssesesssc
6. is displayed while the center of the multi selector is histograms pressed Zoom on a off Press the center of the multi selector to toggle between full frame or thumbnail playback and playback zoom Choose the initial zoom setting from Low magnification Medium magnification and High magnification The zoom display will center on the active focus point f2 Multi Selector If Reset meter off delay is selected operating the multi selector when the exposure meters are off pg 50 will activate the exposure meters If Do nothing the default option is selected the exposure meters will not be activated when the multi selector is pressed f3 Photo Info Playback At the default setting of Info A W Playback lt gt pressing A or Y in full frame playback changes the photo information displayed while pressing lt or gt displays additional images To reverse the role of the multi selector buttons so that pressing A or W displays additional images and pressing lt or gt changes the photo information displayed select Info lt gt PlaybackA V f4 Assign FUNC Button Choose the role played by the Fn button either by itself FUNC button press or when used in combination with the command dials FUNC button dials BE FUNC Button Press Selecting FUNC button press for Custom Setting f4 displays the following options Option Description Pao Press the Fn button to
7. 1 Selecta picture Press lt or gt to view additional pictures or press the EQ button and rotate the main AOK command dial right to zoom in J2 5007 10578200 mmazsex26s2 on the current frame pg 243 Press gt to return to full frame playback To view six pictures at a time press the center of the multi selector Use the multi selector to highlight pictures or press the center of the multi selector again to display the highlighted picture full frame 2 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options button a Setup Start printing Page size No of copies Border Time stamp Cropping 265 3 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press to select Option Description Page size Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu y Page size Printer default 3 5x5in 5x7in A4 No of copies Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or to choose number of copies maximum 99 then press to select and return to previous menu a No of copies Border Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or W to choose print style from Printer default default for current printer Print with border print photo with white borde
8. Continuous High Speed In continuous high speed mode the maximum frame rate for FX 36 x 24 format and 5 4 30 x 24 images is 9 fps The maximum frame rate for DX 24 x 16 format images can be chosen from 9 10 and 11 fps using Custom Setting d2 Shooting speed pg 320 gt Continuous high speed note that at 10 and 11 fps focus will be fixed at the value for the first shot in each burst and when poorly lit exposure will also be fixed at the value for the first shot Buffer Size The approximate number of images that can be mS stored in the memory buffer at current settings is V shown in the exposure count displays in the el eR TA viewfinder and top control panel while the mmm A En i shutter release button is pressed The illustration P is 55 enaa at right shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 33 pictures The displays show 99 when space remains for more than 99 pictures fa F5 6 The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card Up to 130 photographs can be taken in succession note however that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full In rare cases frame rate may also drop when a microdrive memory card is used While photographs are being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the memory card slot will light Dependin
9. The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by a separate non rechargeable CR1616 lithium battery with a life of about four years When this battery is exhausted a icon will be displayed in the top control panel while the exposure meters are on For information on replacing the clock battery see page 393 The Camera Clock The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary 41 42 Insert a Memory Card The camera stores photographs on CompactFlash and microdrive memory cards available separately pg 389 Up to two memory cards can be inserted in the camera simultaneously The following section describes how to insert and format a memory card 1 Turn the camera off Power switch Q Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards 2 Open the card slot cover Open the door protecting the card slot cover release button 0 and press the release button to open the card slot Memory Card Slots Slot 1 is for the main card the card in slot 2 plays a Slot 1 backup or secondary role If the default setting of Overflow is selected for Slot 2 pg 71 when two memory cards are inserted the card in slot 2 will only be used when the card in slot 1 is full The card currently in use is indicated in the top control panel REM
10. There are two pressed halfway and one manual focus mode in which focus must be adjusted manually using the focusing ring on the lens Option Description Camera focuses when shutter release button is pressed 5 halfway Focus locks when in focus indicator appears Sinal serv in viewfinder and remains locked while shutter release utton is pressed halfway focus lock efault settings ae button is pressed halfway focus lock At default setting shutter can only be released when in focus indicator is displayed focus priority Camera focuses continuously while shutter release button c is pressed halfway If subject moves camera will engage Contin sus predictive focus tracking pg 75 to predict final distance to Sane AE subject and adjust focus as necessary At default settings shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus release priority rel jority Camera does not focus automatically focus must be M adjusted manually using the lens focusing ring If Manual maximum aperture of lens is f 5 6 or faster viewfinder ocus indicator can be used to confirm focus electronic pg 83 fi indicat b dt firm fi electronii range finding pg 84 but photographs can be taken at any time whether or not subject is in focus Choose single servo AF for landscapes and other stationary sub jects Continuous servo AF may be a better choice with erratically moving subjects Manual focus is reco
11. sssssssessoscsscscseossssoseosossos pg 274 Standard Definition Devices s sssssssssesssesssssesesesesssssssseeseeseesss pg 274 High Definition Devices ssssssssessesssssssssssreeeessesssssesoeereeesssssss pg 276 255 Connecting to a Computer This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer using the supplied UC E4 USB cable Once the camera is connected Nikon Transfer supplied or optional Nikon software such as Camera Control Pro 2 can be used to copy photographs to the computer or control the camera remotely vV Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle Camera Control Pro 2 Camera Control Pro 2 available separately pg 387 can be used to control the camera from a computer Before connecting the camera set the camera USB option pg 257 to MTP PTP When Camera Control Pro 2 is running F will be displayed in the top control panel 256 EH Before Connecting the Camera Install the necessary software from the supplied installer CD see the Install Guide for more information To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted be sure the camera battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 6 AC adapter available separately Before connecting the camera select the i USB USB option in the camera setup menu pg 350 and choos
12. 108 Oo S a er DI F eS ee ISO button Main command dial Rear control panel 17 18 BE Exposure Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial to choose the exposure mode Choose the exposure mode pg 117 MODE button Use the command dials to adjust exposure Choose a combination of aperture and shutter speed exposure mode SHOOT A P pg 119 ASIA Exposure mode F Main command dial command dial Top control panel PY AG FS AF S REM Emm S GSA fi 5 4 4 Top control panel Choose a shutter speed exposure mode 5 or M pg 120 125 EA CUSTOM Exposure mode Sor Main command dial g eso AF S REM raas umm pa toon A HlO 8 Top control panel Choose an aperture exposure mode F or M pg 122 125 ror N i Exposure mode Aor fi Sub command dial Ma re AF S REM a be tao GSM Top control panel Set exposure compensation pg 132 Main command dial Top control panel Shutter speed lock exposure mode 5 or M cOZ5a pg 127 Main command dial AF S REM m A aa Top control panel Aperture lock exposure mode F or M pg 128 button Sub command dial A bo W AF S REM toon A Ha Top control panel 19 20 Acti
13. Press A or W to highlight an SUES Page size option and press to select 2 35x5in Border 29 Time stamp 4 Option Description Page size Menu of page size options will be displayed pg 266 Press A or W to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu Border Menu of border options will be displayed pg 266 Press A or F to choose print style from Printer default default for current printer Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu Time stamp Menu of time stamp options will be displayed pg 266 Press A or W to choose Printer default default for current printer Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu 6 start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press Page Size Border Time Stamp and Cropping Choose printer default to print at current printer settings Only options supported by the current printer can be selected Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes See Also See page 415 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing 270 BE Creating Index Prints
14. Take pictures Take pictures Live View Options Before taking pictures using live view rotate REM the mode dial to live view and choosea_ f live view mode and the release mode that Y will be used while the camera is in live view BENE s mode The following live view modes are available Option Description Choose when taking hand held shots of moving A Hand held subjects or when framing photographs at angles that default make it difficult to use the viewfinder pg 94 Camera focuses normally using phase detection autofocus Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod View can be enlarged in monitor for precise focus making this mode suitable for static subjects pg 98 Autofocus 2 Tripod can be used to compose photographs with subject positioned at any point in the frame without recomposing photograph Camera focuses using contrast detect autofocus Phase Detection Versus Contrast Detect AF The camera normally uses phase detection autofocus in which focus is adjusted based on data from a special focusing sensor When Tripod is selected in live view however the camera uses contrast detect autofocus in which the camera analyses the data from the image sensor and adjusts focus to produce the greatest contrast Contrast detect autofocus takes longer than phase detection autofocus 91 Release mode can be chosen from the following options Optio
15. The options available for AE L AF L command dials are the same as for FUNC button dials pg 334 except that AE L AF L command dials defaults to None and lacks 1 step spd aperture and Focus point selection options f7 Customize Command Dials This option controls the operation of the main and sub command dials Option Description Controls the direction of the command dials Choose No the default option for normal command dial operation or Yes to reverse the rotation of the command dials This setting also applies to the command dials for vertical shooting At the default setting of Off the main command dial controls shutter speed and the sub command dial controls Change aperture If On is selected the main command dial will main sub control aperture and the sub command dial shutter speed This setting also applies to the command dials for vertical shooting Reverse rotation 339 Option Description Aperture setting At the default setting of Sub command dial aperture can only be adjusted with the sub command dial or with the main command dial if On is selected for Change main sub If Aperture ring is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will show aperture in increments of 1 EV aperture for type G lenses is still set using the sub command dial Live view is not available when Ape
16. To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print in Step 2 of Printing Multiple Pictures pg 268 Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures only the first 256 images will be printed 1 Select Index print 7 PictBridge Highlight Index print in the Print select PictBridge menu pg 268 and 2 Print DPOF press gt Index print The confirmation dialog shown at right pamm will be displayed aaj Co 2 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options 3 Adjust printing options n Stw Choose page size border and time eee OW stamp options as described on page 270 35x5in a warning will be displayed if the ee 5 selected page size is too small 4 start printing Highlight Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before printing is complete press 271 272 BE Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set The Print set DPOF option in the playback menu is used to create digital print orders for PictBridge compatible printers and devices that support DPOF Selecting Print set DPOF from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1 1 Choose Select set ia Print set DPOF Highlight Select set and press gt N Select set gt o Deselect all 2 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display th
17. View panel finder Problem Solution Page Flash unit that does not Change flash sync support red eye mode or use flash unit blink reduction attached and at s bbortsred eva 192 blinks flash sync mode set to PP y reduction red eye reduction Memory insufficient to Reduce quality or 65 69 A r record further photos size a Ia i at current settings or Delete photographs 281 blinks blinks camera has run outof Insert new memory 42 file or folder numbers card Release shutter If error E persists or appears blinks Camera malfunction frequently consult Nikon authorized service representative 412 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page No memory Camera cannot Turn camera off and ead E detect memory confirm that card is 42 card correctly inserted e Error accessing Use Nikon 389 This memory memory card approved card card cannot e Check that contacts be used A are clean If card is EHA Card may be blinks damaged contact damaged retailer or Nikon Insertanother representative card e Unable to create Delete files or insert 42 281 new folder new memory card 413 414 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page This card is not F Memory card has Format memory card formatted ar not been formatted lor insert new 42 45 blinks Format the for use in ca
18. 1 Display the photograph Display the photograph you wish to delete as described in Viewing Photographs on the previous page fi 100NC_D3 DSC_OOt 15 12 2007 10 16 01 The card containing the current photograph is indicated by an icon as shown at right 2 Delete the photograph Press the t button A confirmation dialog will be displayed T button Press the t button again to delete the image and return to playback To exit without deleting the picture press PJ Delete To delete multiple images or to delete images from the second of two memory cards use the Delete option in the playback menu pg 281 Image Recording Options This section describes how to choose image area quality and size and how to choose the role played by memory card slot 2 Image Arean ccscscccscsseccecsseserteccsecesetecevociacereonectscscceserrectseete pg 60 Image Quality eeaeee AAA aeS pg 65 IMa ge Si ZE a AA A et lA aT pg 69 SIOS EPA E A E L E A E O pg 71 59 60 Image Area The camera s FX format 36 0 x 23 9 mm E Image area image sensor can be used to record pictures with an image area picture angle t equivalent to a 35mm 135 format film E Choose image area o camera Image area option in the shooting menu Image area is selected using the At the default setting of Auto DX crop the camera will automatically crop pictures to the DX picture angle when a
19. 124 Aperture number of stops 123 381 Exposure and flash bracketing increment esseessccccscssocsesssssssssere 136 WB bracketing increment 140 Maximum aperture NON CPU lenses wv 222 Aperture stop indicator 123 381 Number of exposures TEMAINING sesssecseecscecseenssessseseees 49 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSULES sessssecesssessseessseseeesseeses 11 Frame COUNT esseecseesseeneeesees Manual lens number Memory card indicator o 10 12 13 Memory card indicator SOC siscsdcarscs cd testssaee diane 14 Custom settings bank 15 Shooting menu bank 16 Flash sync indicator 4 325 17 Flash MOde sessscsssecesseeseeneeees 197 18 Clock battery indicator 41 393 19 FV lock indicator esceseee 202 20 Interval timer indicato 216 21 Image comment indicator 348 22 Beep indicator esccseecsseeees 319 23 Exposure compensation indicatot 00 sseesecssseeccsseeceeseeeeesseees 132 24 Battery indicator eee 48 25 Exposure and flash bracketing INGICATON 00 seesesssseecesstecesseeceesseees 135 WB bracketing indicator 139 26 Focus mode indicato 74 27 Long exposure noise reduction indicator senama 299 28 Color space indicator 187 29 Picture Control indicatov 169 30 Active D Lighting indicator 185 31 High ISO noise reduction Indicator 00
20. 3 EEA Qie r 3 1A 1A 2A 0 Lee fea Seaoanwans 2 1B 0 1B APF fs naiai it H 2 1A O 1A JE oreen 3 1A 1B 0 1A 1B QE ft dtc 5 1A 1B 0 2A 1A 1B 2B 0 3A 2A 1A T HE E EE eS 7 TALB 1B 2B 3B 0 4A 3A 2A 1A Oe EEIT E ee SF is eA 2 TATE 1B 2B 3B 4B See Also See page 149 for a definition of Mired 4 Framea photograph focus and shoot lt W Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program and each copy will have a different white balance Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine tuning If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining am Aa etag A j the number of exposures remaining oa he frame count and icon will flash in j _ _ ies the top control panel a flashing 4 FTX icon will appear in the viewfinder and the shutter release will be disabled Shooting can begin when anew memory card is inserted 141 142 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero GF and are no longer displayed in the control panels The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset pg 206 altho
21. 354x 23 5 13 9x9 2 e ee M 2 080 x 1 384 264x 17 6 10 4x6 9 S 1 392 x920 17 7 x 11 7 7 0 x 4 6 L 3 552 x 2 832 45 1 x 36 0 17 8x 14 2 5 4 30 x 24 M 2 656 x 2 120 33 7 x 26 9 13 3 x 206 S 1 776x 1 416 226x 18 0 8 9x7 1 Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Print size decreases as printer resolution increases NEF RAW Images Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF RAW images When opened in software such as Capture NX available separately or ViewNX supplied NEF RAW images have the dimensions given for large L size images in the table above 69 Image size can be set by pressing E the QUAL button and rotating the sub command dial until the SO QUAL We v desired option is displayed in the rear control panel QUAL button Sub command dial Rear control panel The Image Size Menu Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the shooting menu pg 290 70 Slot 2 Use the Slot 2 option in the shooting menu pg 290 to choose the role played by the memory card in slot 2 Option Rear control panel Description The memory card in slot 2 is Cpe Overflow om ie used to record photographs default eng El when the memory card in slot 1 is fu
22. 7777 4 Em el H71 3 Insert the memory card Access lamp Insert the first memory card in slot 1 Slot 2 should be used only if a card is already inserted in slot 1 Insert the memory card with the rear label toward the monitor D When the memory card is fully inserted the eject button will pop up and the green access lamp Rear label will light briefly vV Inserting Memory Cards Insert the memory card terminals first Direction of Inserting the card upside down or backwards insertion could damage the camera or the card Check T to be sure that the card is in the correct p Oy erminals tl orientation Rear label 4 Close the card slot cover 43 EE Removing Memory Cards 1 Turn the camera off Confirm that the access lamp is off and turn the camera off 2 Remove the memory card Open the memory card slot cover O and press the eject button to partially eject the card The memory card can then be removed by hand Do not push on the memory card while pressing the eject button Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or memory card m Memory Cards e Memory cards may be hot after use Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera e Memory cards that have been formatted in a computer or other device must be reformatted in the camera before they can be used for recording or p
23. and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting Other Settings While multiple exposure mode is in effect memory cards can not be formatted and the following can not be changed image area bracketing and shooting menu options other than White balance and Intvl timer shooting note that Intvl timer shooting can only be adjusted before the first exposure is taken The Lock mirror up for cleaning and Dust off ref photo options in the setup menu can not used 211 HE Interrupting Multiple Exposures Selecting Multiple exposure in the E Multiple exposure shooting menu while a multiple exposureis being recorded displays the options shown at right To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken highlight Cancel and press If shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have been taken a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point If Auto gain is on gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded Note that shooting will end automatically if e A two button reset is performed pg 206 e The camera is turned off e The battery is exhausted e Pictures are deleted 212 Interval Timer Photography The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals 1 Select Interva
24. can be chosen using the HDMI option in the setup menu pg 346 Menu Guide This chapter describes the options available in the camera menus The Playback Menu Managing Image pg 278 O The Shooting Menu Shooting Option pg 290 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings ee eeaeee eE E pg 301 The Setup Menu Camera SetUup sssessessesscsscsscos pg 344 Ki The Retouch Menu Creating REtOUGHKECIGODIES vercceccccccesceentceestceesscecventcetcccetatceees pg 360 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu cssseesee pg 373 277 gt The Playback Menu Managing Images The playback menu contains the options listed below For information on using the playback menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 26 Delete 281 Playback folder 281 Hide image 281 Display mode 282 Copy image s 283 Image review 287 After delete 287 Rotate tall 287 Slide show 288 Print set DPOF 289 278 Selecting Multiple Pictures To select multiple pictures for Delete pg 281 Hide image pg 281 Print set DPOF pg 289 and direct printing pg 268 1 Highlight a picture a Delete i Selected S 100 4 100 5 100 6 OSet EZoom WOK 8 DSC_0001 JPG 15 12 2007 10 16 00 To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the ER button If two memory cards are inserted the slot can be selected by holding the Q butto
25. circle centered on the selected focus point In center weighted metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in the center of the viewfinder the default area for center weighted metering is shown by the 12 mm circle in the viewfinder Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect the following settings can be changed without altering the metered value for exposure Exposure mode Settings P Shutter speed and aperture flexible program pg 119 5 Shutter speed A Aperture The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and top control panel Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect changes to metering take effect when the lock is released See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 317 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway For information on changing the role of the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 338 131 Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera making pictures brighter or darker It is most effective when used with center weighted or spot metering see page 114 In exposure mode M only the exposure information shown in the electronic analog exposure display is affected shutter speed and aperture do not change To choose a valu
26. eeeecseseeceeee 12299 32 Image area indicator 61 33 Release mode single frame continuous indicator 86 Continuous shooting speed 320 34 Auto area AF indicator 77 Focus points indicato 78 AF area mode indicator 77 3D tracking indicator 77 307 35 GPS connection indicator 224 36 Electronic analog exposure Gis play sca tassAdeneucniveeccee 126 15 The Command Dials The main and sub command dials are used alone or in combination with other controls to adjust a variety of settings Fn button IZAN 0 O A BKT button 4 _ button ISO button QUAL button WB button 16 HE Image Quality and Size Press the Fn or QUAL button and rotate the command dials Choose an image area pg 64 Fn button Main command dial Shooting information display The DX format image area is automatically selected when a DX lens is attached Set image SSS w le lle KO i E QUAL button Main command dial Rear control panel Choose an image size pg 70 IS QUAL Vel mfe Sd pres QUAL button Sub command dial Rear control panel EE SO Sensitivity Press the ISO button and rotate the main command dial Set ISO sensitivity pg 5
27. following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet ona circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help CAUTIONS Modifications The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Interface Cables Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Notice for Customers in the State of California WARNING Handling the cord on this product may expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Nikon Inc 1300 Walt Whitman Road Melville New York 11747 3064 U S A Tel 631 547 4200 Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 ATTENTION Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Symbol for Separate Collection in European Countries This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries e This
28. for copying a warning will be Image with same file name already exists displayed To replace the existing file Replace existing image OW highlight Replace existing image or Replace all and press Hidden or protected files in the destination folder will not be replaced Select Skip to cancel replacement and proceed to copy remaining files Select Cancel to cancel before copying is complete Copies have the same protect marking as the original print marking is not copied Voice memos will be copied with their associated images Image Review Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting Option Description On Pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting Off default Pictures can only be displayed by pressing P button After Delete Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted Option Description default Os Show next Display following picture If deleted picture was last frame previous picture will be displayed Display previous picture If deleted picture was first previous frame following picture will be displayed Di Continueas before If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded following picture will be displayed as described for Show next If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse order previous picture will be displayed as de
29. the main command dial note that while exposure compensation can be adjusted by 5 EV only values between 3 and 3 EV can be previewed in the monitor Exposure Preview Matrix metering is used to set exposure Exposure can not be previewed when an optional flash unit is attached bracketing is in effect pg 134 active D lighting is on pg 185 or shutter speed is Sy set to bu Lh or x 250 flash sync speed 6 Take the picture i Press the shutter release button the E rest of the way down to take the picture If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is selected for Release mode the monitor will turn off while the shutter release button is pressed The frame advance rate for continuous mode is the same as that selected for standard shooting I Contrast Detect Autofocus The camera will not continue to adjust focus while a AF ON button is pressed in continuous servo autofocus mode In both single servo and continuous servo autofocus modes the shutter can be released even when the camera is not in focus 99 p 100 vV Focusing with Contrast Detect Autofocus Contrast detect autofocus will take longer than normal phase detection autofocus In the following situations the camera may be unable to focus using contrast detect autofocus e The camera is not mounted on a tripod e The subject contains lines parallel to the long edges of the frame e The subject lacks contrast e Th
30. unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately taking care to avoid burns Continued operation could result in injury After removing the battery take the equipment to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection Do not disassemble Touching the product s internal parts could result in injury In the event of malfunction the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident remove the battery and or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection A Do not use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas as this could result in explosion or fire A Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury A Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation A Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product e Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment e Do not short or disassemble the battery e Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery If you are using an AC adapter be sure it is unplugged e Do not attempt to insert t
31. 1 0 selecting 0 5 cuts gain in half while selecting 2 0 doubles gain The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column 6 Select the second gt Image overlay photograph 5 Image 1 Image 2 Press lt or gt to highlight Image 2 Repeat Steps 2 5 to select the second photo and a a adjust gain 7 Highlight the Preview Image overlay colu mn F Image 1 Image2 Press lt or gt to highlight the n X0 5 S Preview column E WOK 369 8 Preview the overlay T Image overlay lt Overlay Press A or W to highlight Overlay and press to save the overlay without displaying a preview highlight Save and EO Back Wave press To return to Step 7 and select new photos or adjust gain press HS 9 Savethe overlay Press while the preview is displayed to save the overlay After an overlay is created the resulting image will be WWM 5 12 5007 1152918 ouasbusese displayed full frame in the monitor m Image Overlay Only NEF RAW photographs created with the D3 can be selected for image overlay Other images are not displayed in the selection screen Only NEF RAW photographs with the same image area and bit depth can be combined The overlay has the same photo info including date of recording metering shutter speed aperture exposure mode exposure compensation focal length and image orientation and values for white balance and picture control as the photograp
32. 133 Exposure and flash bracketing progress indicator sses 135 WB bracketing progress TNCICATON 0 soeeesssseecessteceeseeceesseees 139 PC connection indicator 259 Tilt IN iCATOL ec eeeecssseececsteceesees 333 10 The Rear Control Panel M DY SEINE NORM BA A 4 1SO AUTO REM pa I LOLOL LIK s LCD Illuminators Holding the power switch in the 8 position activates the exposure meters and the control panel backlights LCD illuminators allowing the displays to be read in the dark After the power switch is released the illuminators will remain lit for six seconds at default settings while the exposure meters are active or until the shutter is released Power switch 1 Image quality JPEG images 66 2 Remaining indicato 49 3 IMAGE S ZE 0 esseessesssesssesssecseseseene 70 4 ISO sensitivity indicator 108 Auto ISO sensitivity INAICATOT siise 110 5 ISO sensitivity ssssss s sssssssssssss0 108 ISO sensitivity high low gain aE AEA T 109 Number of exposures remaining sesseesecsssscseorrocsssssssssssss 49 Length of voice memo 251 White balance fine tuning 150 White balance preset NUMBET oonssonooosoooooooreorrsersesssssssssss 162 Color temperature we 151 PC mode indicator s s s 259 6 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSULES ussssssssssssssssss
33. 24 x 16 or Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on Displayed if Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal Exposure has been set 5 4 30 x 24 E was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu ER 235 BE Shooting Data Page 2 Voice MEMO ICON eeeeseeseeeee Protect status Retouch indicator White balance ccssecssssscsesssees Color temperature White balance fine tuning Preset manual ssssecsseeessees 5 Color SPA eeessssssecseessseeseeeee 6 Picture CONKOL esseceseeeseees Quick adjust wee Original Picture Control khWN N AunBRWN 4 5 6 O 7 2_ Ser 8 SHARPNESS 9 CONTRAST 10 BRIGHTNESS 11 SATURATION 12 HUE 9 Contrast 10 Brightness 11 Saturation 4 cece 171 Filter effects 9 cccssscssseecsssseceees 171 MAHUE S aiian 171 TONING sesesssesssseessssessesssstessseessseess 171 13 Camera name 14 Folder number frame Displayed only if Data is selected for Display model pg 282 Standard and Vivid Picture Controls only Neutral Monochrome and custom Picture Controls Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls Monochrome Picture Controls only Displayed in yellow with image area icon if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 4l was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu 236 BE
34. 327 AE only 327 Flash only 327 WB bracketing 327 Auto FP high speed sync 190 197 325 Auto image rotation 349 Auto meter off 317 Auto meter off delay 317 Auto area AF 76 77 Autofocus 74 76 78 80 82 304 312 B Backlight 10 324 Battery xviii xix 32 36 401 Battery info 353 Beep 319 Body cap 4 37 387 Bracketing 134 327 328 exposure 134 327 flash 134 327 white balance 134 139 327 Bracketing order 329 Bulb 126 Burst 89 320 332 c C 74 304 Calibrating 433 calibration 353 433 charging 32 info 353 Camera Control Pro 2 256 387 Center weighted 114 315 316 Center weighted area 315 Clock 40 41 CLS 190 Color balance 367 Color space 187 Adobe RGB 187 sRGB 187 Color space 187 240 Color temperature 144 146 151 CompactFlash 42 Computer 256 Control panel 8 11 Control panel viewfinder 322 Copy image s 283 Copying images 283 CPU contacts 380 CPU lens 38 380 Creative Lighting System 190 Crop 267 365 Custom setting bank 303 Custom Settings 301 Custom Settings Menu 301 Customize command dials 339 D Date and time 40 347 Daylight saving time 40 347 DCF version 2 0 436 Default settings 206 418 restoring 206 Delete 281 All 281 Selected 281 Delete 58 245 281 all images 281 current image 245 selected images 281 Digital Print Order Format 262 436 Diopter 3 47 385 adjustment control 47 ad
35. 331 Multi selector center button 330 Multiple exposure 208 Multiple exposure 208 My Menu 373 Add items 373 Rank items 376 Remove items 375 N NEF 65 68 NEF RAW 65 68 NEF RAW recording 68 NEF RAW bit depth 68 12 bit 68 14 bit 68 Type 68 Compressed 68 Lossless compressed 68 Uncompressed 68 Nikon Transfer 256 No memory card 342 Non CPU lens data 220 0 Overview data 239 240 P PC 223 259 Photo info 231 Photo info playback 331 PictBridge 263 436 Picture angle 60 297 382 Picture Controls 166 Playback 57 227 274 folder 281 full frame 228 information 231 menu 278 slide show 288 thumbnail 241 330 zoom 243 Playback folder 281 Print options PictBridge Setup menu 266 Border 266 Cropping 267 No of copies 266 Page size 266 Start printing 267 Time stamp 266 Print select 268 Border 270 Page size 270 Start printing 270 Time stamp 270 Print set DPOF 268 272 Border 270 Page size 270 Start printing 270 Time stamp 270 Printing 262 Programmed auto 118 Protecting photographs 244 R Rear curtain sync 197 Red eye correction 364 Red eye reduction 197 Red eye reduction with slow sync 198 Release button to use dial 341 Release mode 85 continuous 86 88 high speed 86 88 low speed 86 88 live view 86 90 mirror up 105 self timer 86 103 single f
36. 90 Recommended at high or low angles or in other situations in which viewfinder is Live view hard to use or when enlarged view in monitor can assist in obtaining very precise focus Use self timer for self portraits or to reduce blurring caused Self timer by camera shake pg 103 Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto Mup or close up photography or in other situations in which the Mirror up _ slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs pg 105 Average frame rate with continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 1 250 s or faster remaining settings other than Custom Setting d2 pg 320 at default values and memory remaining in memory buff er To choose a release mode press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting Release mode dial lock release Release mode dial p 87 iO 88 Continuous Mode To take pictures in CH continuous high speed and Ct continuous low speed modes 1 Select Cu or CL mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to CH or CL Release mode dial 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot While the shutter release button is pressed all the T way down pictures will be taken at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d2 Shooting speed pg 320
37. A Flash Color Information v v Z v Communication REAR Rear curtain sync Y Y Y Y Yv Y v Vv Red eye reduction Vv Vv Vv Vv Auto zoom Vv Y v Only available when SU 800 is used to control other flash units 2 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit 3 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering 4 Selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data 5 Auto aperture AA is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data 6 Selected with flash unit Select 1 250 s Auto FP for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 325 8 CPU lens required N Modeling Illumination CLS compatible Speedlights such as the SB 800 and SB 600 emit a modeling flash when the camera depth of field preview button is pressed This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to preview the total lighting effect achieved with multiple flash units Modeling illumination can be turned off using Custom Setting e3 Modeling flash pg 326 193 Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non TTL auto and manual modes If they are set to TTL the camera shutter release button will lock and no ph
38. Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions 398 Troubleshooting ssscssssscssseeceseseccssseecsssescessescesnscecsseeseesseescnneesenssess 402 Error Messages ADDO O h ANETE AEST xvii For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol A This icon marks warnings To prevent possible injury read all warnings before using this Nikon product xviii BE WARNINGS A Keep the sun out of the frame A Turn off immediately in the event of Keep the sun well out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a fire Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment Using the viewfinder diopter control When operating the viewfinder diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter available separately
39. Choose start time gt Interval timer shooting Start time T m E Or 05 0100 001 x 1 0001 Move Set 13 37 Choose an interval Press lt or gt to highlight hours minutes or seconds press A or W to change Note that the camera will not be able to take photographs gt Interval timer shooting A Cnterval K i w m Or 10 05 01 00 001 x 1 0001 E Move OSet at the specified interval if it is shorter than the shutter speed or the time required to record images Choose the number of intervals and number of shots per interval Press lt or gt to highlight number of intervals or number of shots press A or to change The total number of shots that will be taken is displayed to the right Interval timer shooting BSelect intvisX lt no of shots E4 QOExA 000 gt z 2 Number of Number Total intervals of shots number of interval shots 6 Start shooting gt Interval timer shooting Highlight Start gt On and press to return to the shooting menu without starting the interval timer highlight Start gt Off and press The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken A message will be displayed in the monitor one minute before each series of shots is taken If shooting can not proceed at current settings for example if a shutter speed
40. D 2 D CENDCancel Decrease Darker _ lighter _ W Save saturation Filter Effects Choose from the following color filter effects After adjusting filter effects as described below press to copy the photograph Option Description Creates the effect of a skylight filter making the picture less blue The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right Skylight Cancel save Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects giving the Warm filter copy a warm red cast The effect can be previewed in the monitor Color Balance Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color balance as shown below The effect is displayed in the monitor together with red green and blue histograms pg 233 giving the distribution of tones in the copy Press to copy the photograph CEG Save Increase amount of green Increase N Increase amount of amount of blue wi amber Increase Reis of magenta Creating JPEG Copies of NEF RAW Pictures To create a JPEG copy of an NEF RAW picture select the NEF RAW picture for Color balance and press without modifying color balance The JPEG copy will have an image quality of fine and a size of L 367 368 Image Overlay Image overlay combines two existing NEF RAW photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals with results that are noticeably better than photographs combined
41. Focal length mm Maximum aperture 4 Move Det combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and lens 221 5 Select Done py Non CPU lens data ar Highlight Done and press Don The specified focal length and E Focal lensth mm Ea F qe Maximum aperture F28 aperture will be stored under the chosen lens number This i Move Bet combination of focal length and aperture can be recalled at any time by selecting the lens number using camera controls as described below EE Choosing a Lens Number Using Camera Controls 1 Assign non CPU lens number selection to a camera control Select Choose non CPU lens number as the command dials option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu Non CPU lens number selection can be assigned to the Fn button Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 331 the depth of field preview button Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button pg 337 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 338 222 Use the selected control to choose a lens number Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the top control panel Focal length Maximum aperture SS z8 Main command dial Lens number Using a GPS Unit Optional Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2 01 or 3 01 of the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data fo
42. Glens Type D lens The AF S AF I Teleconverter The AF S AF teleconverter can be used with the following AF S and AF lenses e AF S VR Micro 105mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 500mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED e AF 1 500mm f 4D ED e AF S VR 300mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 600mm f 4D ED II e AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED II e AF S 600mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED e AF I 600mm f 4D ED e AF I 300mm f 2 8D ED e AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 300mm f 4D ED e AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED II e AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED 2 e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED AF S NIKKOR 400mm f 2 8G ED VR e AF I 400mm f 2 8D ED e AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR e AF S 500mm f 4D ED II e AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4G ED VR 1 Autofocus not supported 2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF S Teleconverter TC 17E II TC 20E Il Compatible Non CPU Lenses If lens data are specified using Non CPU lens data pg 220 many of the features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non CPU lenses If lens data are not specified color matrix metering can not be used and center weighted metering is used when matrix metering is selected Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes FA and M when aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring If the maximum aperture has not been specified using Non CPU lens data the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture the actual aperture value must be rea
43. Ink error 263 supply select Continue Out of ink Printer is out of ink Replace ink and 263 select Continue See printer manual for more information Appendix The Appendix covers the following topics DST AUIIES urrira iiaeia EAE EAT ANEA ATARATA pg 418 Memory Card Capacity sssessccssssccssssccsssseccsssccsnscecsnssscesseeessse pg 423 EXPOSUre Program serenana Een aas pg 426 417 Defaults The following defaults are restored either with a two button reset or using Reset shooting menu or Reset custom settings BE Defaults Restored with a Two Button Reset pg 206 Option Default ISO sensitivity pg 108 200 Image quality pg 65 JPEG normal Shooting Image size pg 69 L menu White balance pg 144 Auto Fine tuning pg 147 Off Choose color temp pg 151 5000 K Focus point pg 78 Center Exposure mode pg 116 Programmed auto Flexible program pg 119 Off Shutter speed and aperture lock pg 127 Off Other AE lock hold pg 129 Off settings Exposure compensation pg 132 Off Bracketing pg 134 Off Flash mode pg 197 Front curtain sync FV lock pg 201 Off Multiple exposure pg 208 Off 1 If the current Picture Control has been modified existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored 2 Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting men
44. Sensitivity Control If Off the default setting is chosen for the ISO sensitivity auto control option in the shooting menu ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user see page 108 If On is chosen ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user flash level is adjusted appropriately The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum sensitivity option in the ISO sensitivity auto control menu the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 200 In exposure modes F and A sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter speed Slower shutter speeds may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity When On is selected the viewfinder and NORM AO rear control panel show ISO AUTO When cud B sensitivity is altered from the value selected P i5 5l jpo 3 by the user these indicators blink and the altered value is shown in the viewfinder Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise see page 299 Foreground subjects may be underexposed in photos taken with a flash at slow shutter speeds in daylight or against a bright background Choose a flash mode oth
45. Time zone Date format Daylight saving time Language Choose a language for camera menus and messages The following options are available De Deutsch German Pt Portugu s Portuguese En English English Ru Pycckn Russian Es Espanol Spanish Sv Svenska Swedish Fi Suomi Finnish chy S288 _ Traditional Chinese Fr Fran ais French i ha Simplified Chinese lIt Italiano Italian A AA Japanese NI Nederlands Dutch et ss Korean PI Polski Polish 347 348 Image Comment Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken Comments can be viewed in ViewNX supplied or Capture NX available separately pg 387 The comment is also visible on the third page of the photo information display e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Input comment Input a comment as described on page 292 Comments can be up to 36 characters long e Attach comment Select this option to Image comment attach the comment to all subsequent a photographs Attach comment can be T ania turned on and off by highlighting it and ance pressing gt Auto Image Rotation Photographs taken while On the default option is selected contain information on camera orientation allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback pg 287 or when viewed in ViewNxX or Capture NX available separately pg 387 The following orientations are recorded
46. Top control panel Villy m baad PRE EIN Rear control panel Al T Viewfinder us Pre Top control panel 1 we nah Ld PRE a al ne Rear control panel Viewfinder Select preset d 0 If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately select preset d 0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial until d 0 is displayed in the rear control panel M Direct Measurement Mode If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 317 The default setting is six seconds Preset d 0 The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d 0 automatically replacing the previous value for this preset no confirmation dialog will be displayed A thumbnail will be displayed in the preset white balance list PRE Select WSet To use the new value for white balance select preset d 0 if no value has been measured for white balance before d 0 is selected white balance will be set to a color temperature of 5 200 K the same as Direct sunlight The new white balance value will remain in preset d 0 until white balance is measured again By copying preset d 0 to one of the other presets before measuring a new value for white balance up to five white balance values can be stored pg 158 157 158 EE Copying White Balance from
47. WARRANTY m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon authorized service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual Camera Body 1 BKT bracketing button woes 135 139 327 2 Release mode dial lock rElCASC sssessseesseessesssesssesseees 87 3 Release mode dial 4 Eyelet for camera strap 5 4 flash mode button 6 N command lock DUTTON eisini 127 128 7 Focal plane mark 64 84 8 Metering selector 115 9 Metering selector lock button eesseessesssesssesseesseeees 115 10 Power SWitCh sssssssssssssssssssssseeeeee 48 11 Shutter release button 55 56 12 G4 exposure compensation DuttON siiicar 132 13 Eyelet for camera Strap 5 14 MODE exposure mode b ttON
48. WOK 5 View My Menu The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check mark Items indicated by a N icon can not be selected Repeat steps 1 4 to select additional items fe Additems S Shooting menu bank S Reset shooting menu Active folder File naming Slot 2 v image quality v Image size Image area c Deleting Options from My Menu 1 Select Remove items In My Menu 1 highlight Remove items and press gt 2 Select items Remove items _ Done Highlight items and press gt to Heee me O JPEG i select or deselect Selected mo NEF RAW recordin items are indicated by a check EEES mark 3 Select Done E Remove items a z Highlight Done and press 2 gt Eai A confirmation dialog will be He displayed T O 4 Assign FUNC button 4 Delete the selected items Press to delete the selected items Deleting Items in My Menu To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu press the tf button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press tt again to remove the selected item from My Menu 375 Reordering Options in My Menu 1 Select Rank items In My Menu 1 highlight Rank items and press gt 2 Select an item By Rank items e Image quality NORM Highlight the item you wish to NEF AW rear H move and press gt Select items 3 Position the item E Rank items e Image quality JPEG compression Press Aor
49. all references to the WT 4 also apply to the WT 4A B C D E 261 Printing Photographs Photographs can be printed by any of the following methods e Connect the camera to a printer and print JPEG photographs directly from the camera pg 263 e Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot see the printer manual for details If the printer supports DPOF pg 436 photographs can be selected for printing using Print set DPOF pg 272 e Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer center If the center supports DPOF pg 436 photographs can be selected for printing using Print set DPOF pg 272 e Print JPEG photographs on a printer connected to a network computer using the WT 4 wireless transmitter available separately see the WT 4 user s manual for details e Transfer pictures pg 256 and print them from a computer using ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX available separately pg 387 Note that this is the only method available for printing RAW NEF pictures TIFF Photographs TIFF photographs can be printed from a computer Some digital print services may also support TIFF check with the service before ordering 262 Direct USB Connection If the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer via the supplied USB cable selected JPEG pictures can be printed directly from the camera Take photographs Select photographs for printing using Print set DPOF pg 2
50. balanced results Recommended for most situations Minimal processing for natural results Choose for ENL Neutral photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched Pictures are enhanced for a vivid photoprint effect EWI Vivid Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors EMC Monochrome Take monochrome photographs BE Choosing a Picture Control 1 Select Set Picture Control SHOOTING MENU A PEG compression k In the shooting menu pg 290 4 NEF RAVO recording ae highlight Set Picture Control AR MATAA RGS CATE z Col at and press gt N Active Dishtins E El Long exp NR OFF 2 Select a Picture Control E Set Picture Control Highlight the desired Picture _ z Control and press eRe ee GQGrid GAdiust 168 The Picture Control Grid Pressing the S button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected To select a different Picture Control GQList GAdiust BOK press A or Y then press to display Picture Control options and press The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the shooting information display when the MA button is pressed Picture Control indicator 169 Modifying Existing Picture Controls Existing Nikon or custom Picture Controls c
51. bares ihateesctvastdiaealiascabveosentaes cman 330 f1 Multi Selector Center Button seessssssscsssescceseceeseeeeeee 330 F2 MUIti Selecto russiine 331 f3 Photo Info Playback 331 f4 Assign FUNC Button 331 f5 Assign Preview Button 337 f6 Assign AE L AF L Button uu sssssssecsssssssessecsssessesenseeeeees 338 7 Customize Command Dials sssccssseccssesceceeecesseeceeee 339 f8 Release Button to Use Dial csesssscccsseesesseecesneeeeenee 341 f9 NO Memory Card ceeecssssccssssccssescccnecssssseessneecesnsecssneeessee 342 10 Reverse Indicators seesssssseccsssseccsseesesntecssseeeesseecesneeesene 343 Y The Setup Menu Camera Setup cccsssscssssscssesssssnsesssesessssees 344 Format Memory Card 345 LCD Brightness 345 Lock Mirror up for Cleaning 345 Video MOG sscssssssssstscssasszacsscssccsisecaussanavssacedveuseandsccosdscvsussanteasesde 346 HOM aie E A 346 World TIME cee An ani 347 PAM QUA S si scies asiasana Eee E EA AEEA EEES 347 Image Commenrt 348 Auto Image Rotation 349 VOICE Memo sesser 349 Voice Memo Overwrite sssssssssssssssseersssssssssssssssestereseeessssssssee 350 Voice Memo Button sssssssssssssssssseeseeceeeeeeeeesessesssssssssssssssssneses 350 Audio Output USB iiis Dust off Ref Photo s Battery Afo ene enen eE E Wireless Transmitter ssesscsssesccssseccssesccsnseccsseeceenecseseeeeees 354 Image AUthentication eee
52. become exposed take the power cable to a Nikon authorized service representative for inspection Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock e Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock A Use appropriate cables When connecting cables to the input and output jacks use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations A CD ROMs CD ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment Playing CD ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment A Observe caution when using a flash e Using optional flash units in close contact with the skin or other objects could cause burns e Using optional flash units close to the subject s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment Particular care should be observed when photographing infants when the flash should be no less than one meter 39 in from the subject A Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth Notices e No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language i
53. button the rest oN of the way down to reset focus and exposure and take the picture If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is selected for Release mode the monitor will turn off while the shutter release button is pressed The frame advance rate for continuous mode is the same as that selected for standard shooting 1 No Picture After shooting play the picture back in the monitor to ensure that the photograph has been recorded Note that the sound the mirror makes when the shutter release button is pressed halfway or an AF ON button is pressed can be mistaken for the sound of the shutter and that pressing the shutter release button all the way down when the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF will end live view without a photograph being recorded Tripod Mode 1 Ready the camera Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable level surface Select live view mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Ly i Release mode dial Frame a picture in the viewfinder Frame a picture in the viewfinder and select a focus point using the multi selector then press an AF ON button The AF ON button camera will focus normally and set exposure Note that the camera can NOT be focused by pressing the shutter release button halfway Press the shutter release button all the way dow
54. chamber when the battery is not inserted slide the battery release in the direction indicated by the arrow lt 44 remove the BL 4 from the battery and replace it on the camera The BL 1 battery chamber cover for D2 series cameras can not be used 4 insert the battery Insert the battery as shown at right 5 Latch the cover To prevent the battery from becoming dislodged during operation rotate the latch to the closed position and fold it down as shown at right Be sure the cover is securely latched EN EL4a Rechargeable Li ion Batteries The supplied EN EL4a shares information with compatible devices enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels pg 48 The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge battery life and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged pg 353 The battery can be recalibrated as necessary to ensure that battery level continues to be reported accurately pg 433 35 36 M The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii xx and 398 401 of this manual To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 40 C 104 F During charging the temperature should be in the vicinity of 5 35 C 41 95 F for best results charge the battery at temperatur
55. commander and SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 as remotes Auto FP High Speed Sync and modeling illumination supported with all CLS compatible flash units except SB 400 Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS compatible flash units White balance White balance Auto TTL white balance with main image sensor and 1 005 segment RGB sensor 7 manual modes with fine tuning color temperature setting Live view Modes Hand held tripod Autofocus e Hand held Phase detection AF with 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors e Tripod Contrast detect AF anywhere in frame Monitor Monitor 3 in 920 000 dot VGA low temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with 170 viewing angle 100 frame coverage and brightness adjustment Playback Playback Full frame and thumbnail four or nine images playback with playback zoom slide show histogram display highlight display auto image rotation image comment up to 36 characters and voice memo input and playback Interface USB Hi Speed USB Video output Can be selected from NTSC and PAL HDMI output Version 1 3a with type A HDMI connector camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is connected 431 Interface Ten pin remote terminal Can be used to connect remote control or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183 version 2 01 or 3 01 requires optional MC 35 GPS adapter cord and cable with D sub 9 pin connector Supported languages Supported languages Chine
56. electronic analog exposure displays see page 126 and continue to adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is achieved Sub command dial M 25a Setting aperture AFS REM i tm Setting shutter speed Gaon A SYat d Main command dial Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected setting see pages 127 128 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot a WA Shutter speed 1 250 s Aperture f 8 w s AF Micro Nikkor Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture 125 Electronic Analog Exposure Displays The electronic analog exposure displays in the viewfinder and top control panel show whether the photograph would be under or over exposed at current settings Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 313 the amount of under or over exposure is shown in increments of 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded the displays will flash Custom Setting b2 set to 1 3 step Optimal exposure Underexposed by 3 EV Overexposed by over 3 EV Control panel FURE SOR pa e i anes dees Viewfinder lt a a a Long Time Exposures At a shutter speed of hut 4 the shutter will remain op
57. esnunsaniies ari 117 nim format DUtTON wees 45 15 Top control panel uu esses 8 16 Diopter adjustment knob 47 17 Accessory shoe for optional flash unit 18 Accessory shoe cover e EAE 22 204 400 Camera Body Continued T MUFF ecesseesesssseeee 90 105 395 2 Self timer lamp scseeecceeeeeee 104 3 Flash sync terminal cover 204 4 Ten pin remote terminal COVED wiesessessssssssesesesssseseessseers 223 388 5 Flash sync terminial 0 204 6 Ten pin remote terminal wees 223 388 7 USB connector cover 258 264 8 Lens release button 38 9 Connector Cover 274 276 seul AlvouT ll Hom 10 USB connector 258 264 11 DC IN connector for optional AC adapter EH 6 383 12 Audio video A V CONNECTOT sesseecseccseensscnseeseersees 274 13 HDMI CONNECHOT ee eeseeeseeeee 276 14 Focus mode selector 74 83 15 Battery cover latch 34 16 Battery chamber covet 34 17 Meter coupling lever 429 18 Body CaP eeeesssesccsssscssseescenteeesnsees 387 1 Depth of field preview 6 Vertical shooting shutter button woeecesseessecssesseeseesseeee release button lock uu 54 2 Sub command dial 7 CPU contacts 3 Fn button 64 202 331 8 Mounting index seceee 37 4 Sub command dial for 9 LENS MOUNK ce eesesessesseeseesees 84 Vertical SHOOTING ssssesseeesseees 16 10 Trip
58. f2 Multi selector 331 b6 Fine tune optimal exposure 315 f3 Photo info playback 331 c Timers AE lock f4 Assign FUNC button 331 cl Shutter release button AE L 317 f5 Assign preview button 337 a2 Auto meter off delay 317 f6 Assign AE L AF L button 338 G Self timer delay 318 f Customize command dials 339 lt 4 Monitor off delay 318 f8 Release button to use dial 341 f9 No memory card 342 f10 Reverse indicators 343 Custom Setting Bank Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To storea particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described on page 291 Custom Settings Bank If settings in the current bank have been 4 modified from default values the bank letter will i5 F5 6 appear in the top control panel and shooting AFS REM information displays An asterisk will be Tony 5Ha displ
59. flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander 2 Ae D 68 F SB 800 and SB 600 at 35 mm zoom head position 3 27 mm zoom coverage 4 24 mm zoom coverage EE SU 800 Wireless Speedlight Commander When mounted on a CLS compatible camera the SU 800 can be used as a commander for remote SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power divide the Guide Number by the aperture For example at ISO 100 the SB 800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft its range at an aperture of f 5 6 is 38 5 6 or about 6 8 meters or in feet 125 5 6 23 ft 7 in For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two approximately 1 4 191 192 The following features are available with the SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and SU 800 Flash unit Advanced Wireless Lighting Commander Remote Flash mode feature SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 800 SU 800 SB 800 SB 600 SB R200 iTTL ag aes yrivelwilyvylyvlyvilvly AA Auto aperture Ytl lL ll O wr A Non TTL auto Yvi I GN Range priority manual M Manual Yv Yv vY Yv Y Vv Vv RPT Repeating flash Yi v Vv Vv Y Auto FP High Speed Sync Y v vY Y V Vviv FV lock Y vY Uv YU Vv Viv Vv AF assist for multi areaAF YW Y v Vv ee
60. for Voice memo is indicated by an icon in the rear control panel NORM we m NORM we ISO A A Iso a A eng bs m goo f On auto and manual Manual only 249 250 Automatic Recording Shooting Mode If On Auto and manual is selected for Voice memo pg 248 a voice memo will be added to the most recent photograph when shooting ends Recording will end when the amp button is pressed or after the specified recording time has ended Manual Recording Shooting Mode If On Auto and manual or Manual only is ZY selected for Voice memo pg 248 a voice memo can be recorded for the most recent eo photograph by pressing and holding the amp IPA button A voice memo will be recorded while the button is held down note that no voice memo will be recorded if the button is not held down for at least one second button M Automatic Recording Voice memos will not be recorded automatically if On is selected for the Image review option pg 287 in the playback menu M slot 2 If two memory cards are inserted and Backup or RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 is selected for the Slot 2 option pg 71 in the shooting menu voice memos will be associated with the images recorded to the memory card in slot 1 Playback Mode To add a voice memo to the photograph currently displayed in full frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list pg 228 1 Choosea photograph D
61. for vertical shooting Use the main command dial to move the focus area selection left or right the sub command dial to move it up or down Main command dial for vertical shooting Main command dial for vertical shooting Fn button Sub command dial for vertical shooting Fn button Sub command dial for vertical shooting 336 f5 Assign Preview Button Choose the role played by the depth of field preview button either by itself Preview button press or when used in combination with the command dials Preview command dials The options available are the same as for FUNC button press pg 331 and FUNC button dials pg 334 except that the default option for Preview button press is Preview and that Preview command dials lacks a Focus point selection option the default setting for Preview command dials is None 337 338 f6 Assign AE L AF L Button Choose the role played by the AE L AF L button either by itself AE L AF L button press or when used in combination with the command dials AE L AF L command dials The options available for AE L AF L button press are the same as for FUNC button press pg 331 except that AE L AF L button press defaults to AE AF lock and has an additional AF 0N option if this option is selected pressing the AE L AF L button has the same effect as pressing the AF 0N button to initiate autofocus
62. g i M yQ start the timer The self timer lamp will start to blink stopping two seconds before the photograph is taken To turn the self timer off before a photograph is taken turn the release mode dial to another setting B ania In self timer mode a shutter speed of tub amp is equivalent to approximately 1 5 s See Also For information on changing the timer duration see Custom Setting c3 Self timer delay pg 318 For information on setting a beep to sound during the timer count down see Custom Setting d1 Beep pg 319 Mirror up Mode Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised Use of a tripod is recommended 1 Select mirror up mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Mup Release mode dial 2 Raise the mirror 4 Frame the picture focus and then press on the shutter release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror m Using the Viewfinder Note that autofocus metering and framing can not be confirmed in the viewfinder while mirror is raised 3 Takea picture i Press the shutter release button all the es way down again to take a picture To prevent blurring caused by camera movement press the shutter release button smoothly or use an optional remote cord pg 388 The mirror lowers when shooting ends Mirror up Mode A pict
63. image E White balance E Preset manual Highlight Select image and E press gt Set Edit comment amp Select image Copy d 0 159 4 Highlight a source image E White balance 6 Select image ge Highlight the source image To i gniig 9 FSR view the highlighted image full ic LA frame press the MR button is bars Ai PRE Set GQZoom If two memory cards are inserted the slot can be selected by holding the m button and pressing A The menu Slot 1 shown at right will be displayed F pg 230 highlight the desired slot and press Choose slot Cancel 5 Copy white balance Press the center of the multi selector to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset If the highlighted photograph has a comment pg 348 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset Choosing a White Balance Preset Press A to highlight the current white balance ss White balance preset d O d 4 and press gt to select another Ga Preset manual preset E gt Change Set Edit comment Select image Copy H0 Y c R 160 EE Selecting a White Balance Preset To set white balance to a preset value 1 Select PRE Preset manual Fluorescent Y Direct sunlight Highlight Preset manual in AK 2 cout the white balance menu ET pg 144 and press P PHL PRE Preset mana Select a preset E White balance Le Hig
64. in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings before creating an overlay set image quality and size pp 65 69 all options are available To create a NEF RAW copy choose an image quality of NEF RAW 1 Select Image overlay Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press gt The dialog shown at right will be displayed with Image 1 highlighted gt Image overlay Image1 Image2 Preview QZoom Select Display NEF RAW images Press A picture selection dialog will be displayed Image overlay lt Image 1 pa 100 2 100 3 E 00 4 ie 00 6 QZoom WOK Highlight a photograph Press AW or P to highlight the first photograph in the overlay To view the highlighted photograph full frame press and hold the Q button Image overlay lt Image 1 oa pa 100 2 100 3 bar 00 4 ie 00 6 QZoom WOK 4 Select the highlighted F Image overlay photograph S Image 1 Image2 Preview Press to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display Doun ae The selected image will appear as Image 1 5 Set gain Image overlay Image2 Preview Optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing A or to select the gain for image 1 3 from values between 0 1 and EDZoom _ Wselect 2 0 The default value is
65. is to view the amount in the fine tuning menu Exposure compensation pg 132 is preferred in most situations c Timers AE Lock c1 Shutter Release Button AE L At the default setting of Off exposure only locks when the AE L AF L button is pressed If On is selected exposure will also lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway c2 Auto Meter off Delay This option controls how long the camera Option continues to meter exposure when no DAs 4s operations are performed Choose from 4s 6s 6s default 6s 8s 165 305s 1 minute 5 minutes Dgs 8s 10 minutes 30 minutes or until the camerais 6s 16s turned off No limit The shutter speed and 3s 30s aperture displays in the top control paneland in 1min viewfinder turn off automatically when the 51 5 min exposure meters turn off ln 10 min Dm 30 min co No limit Choose a shorter meter off delay for longer battery life When the camera is powered by an optional EH 6 adapter the auto meter off delay is equivalent to No limit 317 c3 Self Timer Delay This option controls the length of the shutter Option release delay in self timer mode Choosefrom 2s 2s 2s 55s 10s and 20s Obs 5s Oils 10 s default Oils 20s c4 Monitor off Delay This option controls how long the monitor Option remains on when no operations are Oils 10s performed Choose from 10 s 20s 1 minute 5 2s 20 s default
66. minutes or 10 minutes Choose a shorter in 1 min monitor off delay for longer battery life 5n 5min Regardless of the setting chosen the monitor Slm 10 min remains on if no operations are performed for about ten minutes when the camera is powered by an optional EH 6 AC adapter 318 d Shooting Display d1 Beep Choose High or Low to sound a beep when the self timer is used or the camera focuses in single servo autofocus note that a beep will not sound if Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection pg 305 Option Description i Choose the pitch of the beep 7 H High from High and Low A Pies Fa icon is displayed in the top AFS REM TA 4L Low control panel and shooting m SNL information displays Off default Turn the beep speaker off 319 320 d2 Shooting Speed Choose the maximum frame advance rate for CH continuous high speed and C continuous low speed modes Note that the frame advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter speeds or when using VR vibration reduction mode with VR lenses Option Description In CH continuous high speed mode the frame advance rate for DX format pg 61 can be selected from 9 the default setting 10 and 11 frames per second fps Regardless of the setting chosen the maximum frame rate for other formats is fixed at 9 fps Continuous high speed Choose th
67. only Custom Setting e4 set to AE amp flash Flash bracketing is performed only with i TTL or AA flash control If a setting other than Flash only is selected and a flash is not used ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot regardless of the setting selected for ISO sensitivity auto control pg 110 e6 Bracketing Order At the default setting of MTR gt under gt over IN bracketing is performed in the order described on pages 136 and 140 If Under gt MTR gt over gt is selected shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value 329 330 f Controls f1 Multi Selector Center Button This option determines what operations can be performed by pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting and playback modes HE Shooting Mode Selecting Shooting mode displays the following options Option Description Select center RESET focus point Pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting mode selects the center focus point default Not used Pressing the center of the multi selector has no effect when the camera is in shooting mode BE Playback Mode Selecting Playback mode displays the following options Option Description Thumbnail F on off Press the center of the multi selector to toggle between default full frame and thumbnail playback p In both full frame and thumbnail playback a histogram View PES
68. preset aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode set aperture using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph e PF 4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA 4 Camera Holder 379 380 m Incompatible Accessories and Non CPU Lenses The following accessories and non CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D3 e TC 16AS AF teleconverter e AF lenses for the F3AF AF 80mm f e Non Al lenses 2 8 AF 200mm f 3 5 ED AF e Lenses that require the AU 1 Teleconverter TC 16 focusing unit 400mm f 4 5 600mm_ PC 28mm f 4 serial number 180900 f 5 6 800mm f 8 1200mm f 11 or earlier e Fisheye 6mm f 5 6 7 5mm f 5 6 e PC 35mm f 2 8 serial numbers 8mm f 8 OP 10mm f 5 6 851001 906200 e 2 1cm f 4 e PC 35mm f 3 5 old type e Extension Ring K2 e Reflex 1000mm f 6 3 old type e 180 600mm f 8 ED serial numbers Reflex 1000mm f 11 serial numbers 174041 174180 142361 143000 360 1200mm f 11 ED serial e Reflex 2000mm f 11 serial numbers numbers 174031 174127 200111 200310 e 200 600mm f 9 5 serial numbers 280001 300490 Lens f number The f number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring CPU contacts Aperture ring Niko ae ton se CPU lens 7 Type
69. preview depth of field Preview pg 117 Press the Fn button to lock flash value SB 800 FV lock SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units only pg 201 Press again to cancel FV lock 331 332 Option Description Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is Ba AE AF lock pressed M AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed AE lock Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second ME Reset on i release time the shutter is released or the exposure meters turn off Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and sa AE lock A AER Hold remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off fa AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed Flash off The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn button is pressed If the Fn button is pressed while exposure or flash bracketing is active in single frame release mode all shots in the current bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If Bracketing white balance bracketing is active or continuous BKT burst release mode mode CH or CL is selected the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter release button is held down in single frame release mode white balance bracketing will be repeated at the frame rate for CH release mode Matrix M
70. priority or whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority in single servo AF To select single servo AF rotate the focus mode selector to S Option Description Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed Focus Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator default is displayed Release E Regardless of the option selected focus will lock while the in focus indicator is displayed 305 a3 Dynamic AF Area If the subject leaves the selected focus point when dynamic area AF t pg 76 is selected in continuous servo AF focus mode C pg 74 the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points Choose the number of points from 9 21 and 51 based on subject movement Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Option Description i If the subject leaves the selected focus point the fajg 9 Points camera will focus based on information from the default eeeeeeees ee ee Ls te eee eee eee teeeeeeee surrounding eight focus points Choose when there is time to compose the photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving predictably e g runners or race cars on a track 3 21 21 points teehee eee teehee eee ee eer Pe eees eee ce eee tee ee eens If the subject leaves the selected focus point
71. protects the contacts when the terminal is not in use The following accessories can be used all lengths are approximate Accessory Description Length Remote shutter release with blue yellow Remote Cord and black terminals for connection to a 1m MC 22 remote shutter triggering device allowing 3 ft 3 in control via sound or electronic signals Remote Cord i dues camera shake orkeep the shutter 2067 MC 30 oe 2 ft 7 in open during a time exposure Remote shutter release can be used for interval timer photography or to reduce Remote Cord camera shake or keep the shutter open 85 cm MC 36 during a time exposure Equipped with 2 ft 9 in back lit control panel shutter release lock cack for use in bulb photography and timer that beeps at one second intervals Extension Cord Can be connected to ML 3 or MC series 20 3m 22 23 25 30 or 36 Only one MC 21 can MC 21 F 9 ft 10 in be used at a time Connecting Cord Connects two cameras for simultaneous 40 cm MC 23 operation 1 ft 4 in Ten pin to two pin adapter cord for Adapter Cord connection to devices with two pin 20cm MC 25 terminals including the MW 2 radio 8 in control set MT 2 intervalometer and ML 2 modulite control set GPS Adapter Cord poplied by manufacturer of GPS device SSM MC 35 pp ISS oy 14 in pg 223 Modulite Remote Control Set ML 3 Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 8
72. s 2 1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync slow rear curtain sync and slow sync with red eye reduction flash modes 2 Speeds as fast as 000 s are available with optional SB 800 and SB 600 flash units when 1 250 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 325 3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity When setting aperture in exposure modes A and consult the table of flash ranges provided with optional Speedlight See Also For information on choosing a flash sync speed see Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 325 For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash see Custom Setting e2 Flash shutter speed pg 326 FV Lock This feature is used to lock flash output allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture FV lock is available with CLS compatible flash units only To use FV lock 1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button fs 4 Assan FUNC button FUNC button press t Select FV lock for Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button gt FUNC button leaner T ie AE lock Reset on release press pg 331 MS AE lock Hold E ti AF lock only 2 Attach
73. selector 3 Photo info playback 4 Assign FUNC button 5 Assign preview button 6 Assign AE L AF L button 7 Customize command dials 8 Release button to use dial 302 The following Custom Settings are available Custom Setting Page Custom Setting Page Custom setting bank 303 d Shooting display B Reset custom settings 303 d1 Beep 319 a Autofocus d2 Shooting speed 320 al AF C priority selection 304 43 Max continuous release 320 a2 AF S priority selection 305 d4 File number sequence 321 a3 Dynamic AF area 306 45 Control panel viewfinder 322 a4 Focus tracking with lock on 308 d6 Shooting info display 323 a5 AF activation 308 47 LCD illumination 324 a6 Focus point illumination 309 d8 Exposure delay mode 324 a7 Focus point wrap around 310 e Bracketing flash a8 AF point selection 310 el Flash sync speed 325 a9 AF ON button 311 e2 Flash shutter speed 326 a10 Vertical AF ON button 312 3 Modeling flash 326 b Metering exposure e4 Auto bracketing set 327 b1 ISO sensitivity step value 313 Auto bracketing Mode M 328 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 313 _ 6 Bracketing order 329 b3 EV steps for exposure comp 313 f Controls b4 Easy exposure compensation 314 f1 Multi selector center button 330 b5 Center weighted area 315
74. source is in the frame e Center weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors filter factors over 1x Y44 Y48 Y52 O56 R60 XO X1 C PL ND2S ND4 ND4S ND8 ND8S ND400 A2 A12 B2 B8 B12 Optional flash units e Nikon Speedlights SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 e Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB R200 Controlled remotely using the SB 800 flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander e Wireless Speedlight Commander SU 800 See page 191 for more information PC card adapters e EC AD1 PC Card Adapter The EC AD1 PC card adapter allows Type CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in PCMCIA card slots Software e Capture NX A complete photo editing package e Camera Control Pro 2 Control the camera remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk e Image Authentication Determine whether photographs taken with image authentication on have been modified after shooting Note Use the latest versions of Nikon software Most Nikon software offers an auto update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet Body cap e Body Cap BF 1A The BF 1A keeps the mirror viewfinder screen and low pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place 387 388 The D3 is equipped with a ten pin remote terminal for remote control Remote and automatic photography The terminal terminal is provided with a cap which accessories
75. speed aperture the number of exposures remaining and AF area mode is displayed in the monitor when the M button is pressed To clear shooting information from the monitor press the W button again or press the shutter release button halfway At default settings the monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 20 seconds info button 123 pom 7 15 fs SHOOT EA id Miani igi Gee p 19 20 21 Ba mm REAR jk alas L E EE E fel eo 1 36 as AF C MAA waste 24 Tas A ela A 2 35 I 36 27 CNREE rats 28 ps com et L ASD 34 33 32 31 30 See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 318 For information on changing the color of the lettering in the shooting information display see Custom Setting d6 Shooting info display pg 323 14 1 Exposure MOEe secssssscsessseees 116 2 Flexible program indicator 119 3 Shutter speed lock icon 127 4 Shutter speed 120 124 Exposure compensation VAN UC saarena 132 Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing sequence EATER ETA 135 Number of shots in WB bracketing sequence 139 Focal length NON CPU lenses cscessessesees 222 5 Multiple exposure indicator 210 6 Aperture lock ICON 128 7 Aperture f number 122
76. the camera will focus based on information from the surrounding 20 focus points Choose when photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably e g players at a football game 2 51 51 points If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will focus based on information from the surrounding 50 focus points Choose when photographing subjects that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder e g birds 306 Option Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will use 3D tracking to track the subject 51 points and select a new focus point as required Use to 3D tracking quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side e g tennis isi players If the subject leaves the viewfinder 32253223277 remove your finger from the shutter release button 3D and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point f 3D 3D Tracking When the shutter release button is pressed halfway the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera Consequently 3D tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame 307 a4 Focus Tracking with Lock On This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance to the subject Option Description AFE
77. the focus point at default settings the center focus point is selected 5 Choose single servo Focus mode autofocus selector S single servo autofocus is selected at shipment If another focus mode has been selected rotate the focus mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to S single servo autofocus At this setting the camera will automatically focus on the subject in the selected focus point when the shutter release button is pressed halfway Pictures can only be taken when the camera is in focus 6 Choose matrix metering Metering selector amp 3 matrix metering is selected at shipment If another option has been selected press the metering selector lock button and rotate the metering selector to 3 Matrix metering uses information from the 1 005 segment RGB sensor to ensure optimal results for the entire frame 53 54 Ready the Camera When framing photographs in the viewfinder hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep you upper body stable When framing photographs in portrait tall orientation unlock the shutter release button for vertical shooting pg 5 and hold the camera as shown at right For information on framing photographs in the mo
78. use preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5 000 5 500K appear white light sources with a lower color temperature such as incandescent light bulbs appear slightly yellow or red Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue See Also When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 Auto bracketing set pg 327 the camera will create several images each time the shutter is released White balance will be varied with each image bracketing the value currently selected for white balance See pages 134 for more information Fine Tuning White Balance White balance can be fine tuned to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image White balance is fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial HE The White Balance Menu 1 Select a white balance E White balance option Select White balance in the E EER shooting me
79. was created from two images using Image overlay press A or W to view the other source image To exit to playback mode press the MENU button To return to Step 2 with the highlighted image selected press or the center of the multi selector My Menu Creating a Custom Menu The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus for quick access up to 20 items Options can be added deleted and reordered as described below For information on basic menu operations see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 26 Adding Options to My Menu 1 Select Add items A MMU O e Image quality NORM In My Menu highlight Add S NEAM raris gt 4 Assign FUNC button items and press gt Saits D Remove items ae Rank items 2 Select a menu Add items Highlight the name of the E Playback menu menu containing the option 2 Custom setting menu Setup menu you wish to add and press gt fi Retouch menu 3 Select an item E Add items ca Shooting menu bank Highlight the desired menu E S nne item and press E ooo v Image quality Image size Image area 373 374 4 Position the new item Press A or W to move the new item up or down in My Menu Press to add the new item F Choose position Image quality JPEG compression NEF RAW recording A 4 Assign FUNC button Move
80. 3 strap pg 5 LI Warranty T User s Manual this guide I Quick Guide 1 Software Installation Guide LJ Software Suite CD ROM C1 Registration card U S A only Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need the following symbols and conventions are used IV This icon marks cautions information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera This icon marks notes information that should be read before using the camera Menu items options and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Trademark Information Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation Microdrive is a trademark of Hitachi Global Storage Technologies in the United States and other countries HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders z Z9 Introduction Tutorial KA Image Recording Options Focus Release Mode EJ ISO Sensitivity Exposure M White Balance Image Enhancement Flash Photo
81. 4 Frame COUnt ssssesssseessseesssseossssee 49 20 Battery indicator cscs 48 Number of exposures 21 Electronic analog exposure FEMA N NG ceereereeseerneerneereeeeneenee 49 display eee 126 Number of shots remaining Exposure compensation display before memory buffer fills 88 os caseentnesentnetntnetneee 133 Preset white balance THUAN CAGE cic crcescteincasinsts 333 recording indicator 155 99 Exposure compensation Exposure compensation INd CAtOT sssssssssssssssssessesssnseesnee 132 value svstnnntnnnnnncnnsi 132 53 Exposure and flash bracketing PC mode indicator nnn ma INCI CATON eesessseecsccssseessccnsnesees 135 15 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSULES seccssscsssssssseesssesecesseeses 49 Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached pg 191 The flash ready indicator lights when the flash is charged M No Battery When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted the display in the viewfinder will dim This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully charged battery is inserted I The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature and the response times of the displays may drop at low temperatures This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction 13 The Shooting Information Display Shooting information including shutter
82. 57MB 229 28 compressed 12 bit NEF RAW Lossless _ compressed 14 bit 70MB i 23 NEF RAW _ Compressed 12 bit YMB 312 Pe NEF RAW _ Compressed 14 bit So MB 290 Aa NEF RAW Uncompressed E 8 1 MB 229 25 12 bit NEF RAW Uncompressed 10 7 MB 177 22 14 bit L 15 3 MB 124 20 TIFF RGB M 8 8 MB 220 25 S 4 3 MB 480 41 L 2 5 MB 637 130 JPEG fine M 1 4 MB 1100 130 S 0 6 MB 2400 130 L 1 2 MB 1200 130 JPEG normal M 0 7 MB 2000 130 S 0 3 MB 4400 130 L 0 6 MB 2400 130 JPEG basic M 0 3 MB 3900 130 S 0 2 MB 7800 130 424 1 All figures are approximate File size varies with scene recorded 2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression ISO sensitivity is set toH 0 3 or higher High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or ISO sensitivity is set to 2000 or higher or long exposure noise reduction active D Lighting or image authentication is on 3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly d3 Max Continuous Release pg 320 The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 130 425 Exposure Program The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph ISO 200 lens w
83. 72 Select MTP PTP in camera USB menu and connect camera to printer pg 264 Print photographs Print multiple Create index prints one ata time photographs pg 265 pg 268 pg 271 l Disconnect USB cable M USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard Printing Via Direct USB Connection Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH 6 AC adapter When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection set Color space to SRGB pg 187 263 BE Connecting the Printer Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Select MTP PTP as If the USB option in the camera setup menu has been changed from the default setting of MTP PTP display the USB menu and select MTP PTP pg 257 Y lt W Mass Storage o IE MTP P TP Turn the camera off 3 Connect the USB cable Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle 4 Turn the camera on A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor followed by a PictBridge playback display i 4 OWSetup PictBridge f s 100NC_D3 DSC_0001 JPG 12 2007 10 16 00 Q p NORMAL 15 4256x2832 264 EE Printing Pictures One at a Time
84. A autofocus or M A autofocus with manual priority 37 EE Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses To remove the lens press and hold the lens release button while turning the lens clockwise After removing the lens replace the lens caps and camera body cap 7 CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring pg 380 lock aperture at the minimum setting highest f number See the lens manual for details Lens An AF Nikkor 85 mm f 1 4D lens is used in this manual for illustrative purposes Lens cap Mounting index CPU contacts pg 380 Image Area The DX format image area is automatically selected when a DX lens is attached Image area 38 Basic Setup The language option in the setup menu is automatically highlighted the first time menus are displayed Choose a language and set the time and date T Turn the camera on Power switch 2 Select language Press MENU to display the camera menus then select Language in the setup menu For information on using menus see Using Camera Menus pg 28 SETUP MENU f e Format memory card LCD brightness 0 Lock mirror up for cleaning Video mode AUTO E Image comment OFF 3 Selecta language De Deutsch i MM Enolish Press A or to highlight the SEs Espa ol desired lang
85. AF Teleconverter W v v viv v v D F w Other AF Nikkor _ 3 except lenses for F3AF Mm al a MIM Al P Nikkor Vv ViVvivi iv v Al Al modified Nikkor or __ 0 ulna ea ial zis Nikon Series E lenses 2 K Ms fal a Medical Nikkor 120mm 16 z 4 Y Y Y z Reflex Nikkor Y iv w PC Nikkor v gt Y iv l Y m Al type Teleconverter v Y v v iyt a PB 6 Bellows Focusing v3 vil lv2 lv Attachment Auto extension rings PK series 11A 12 or 13 v3 v v 8 v PN 11 1 IX Nikkor lenses can not be used 2 Vibration Reduction VR supported with VR lenses 3 Spot metering meters selected focus point 4 The camera s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting and or tilting the lens or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used 5 Electronic rangefinder can not be used with shifting or tilting 6 Manual exposure mode only 7 Can be used with AF S and AF I lenses only pg 381 8 With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster 10 11 12 20 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80 200mm f 2 8 AF 35 70mm f 2 8 AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lt New gt or AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lens at maximum zoom in focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focu
86. DX format lens is attached The Choose image area option can be used to select a 35mm picture angle or to crop photographs to the DX format picture angle or to a 5 4 aspect ratio EE Auto DX Crop Choose whether to automatically select a DX crop when a DX lens is attached Option Description On default Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is attached off Crop selected for Choose image area is used BE Choose Image Area Choose the image area used when Off is selected for Auto DX crop pg 63 Option Description FX format 36x24 Images are recorded in FX format using the full area of the image sensor 36 0 x 23 9 mm producing a picture angle equivalent to a Nikkor lens ona 35mm format camera The edges of pictures taken with DX format lenses will be blacked out P_ i5 66 EmA AFS ASANA REW aT S47 Shooting information display fox DX format 24x16 An area at the center of the image sensor 23 5 x 15 6 mm is used to record pictures in DX format To calculate the approximate focal length of the lens in 35mm format multiply by 1 5 5 4 30x24 Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 4 30 0 x 23 9 mm The edges of pictures taken with DX format lenses will be blacked out 61 DX Lenses DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a smaller picture angle than lenses for 35mm format cam
87. ISO Sensitivity Step Value This option determines whether adjustments Option to sensitivity are made in increments 413 1 3 step equivalent to 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV default 1 2 1 2 step 1 1step b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl This option determines whether adjustments to shutter speed aperture and bracketing are made in increments equivalent to 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV Option Description Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments equivalent to 3 EV The bracketing increment can be selected from 1 3 2 3 and 1 EV Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments 1 2 1 2 step equivalent to 1 2 EV The bracketing increment can be selected from 2 and 1 EV Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments equivalent to 1 EV The bracketing increment is set to 1 EV 1 3 step 13 default 1 1step b3 EV Steps for Exposure Comp This option determines whether adjustments Option to exposure compensation are made in 1 3 step increments equivalent to 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV default 1 2 1 2 step 1 1step 313 b4 Easy Exposure Compensation This option controls whether the i button is needed to set exposure compensation pg 132 If On Auto reset or On is selected the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0 Option Description Exposure compensation is set by rotatin
88. Long When the distance to the subject changes abruptly the Normal camera waits for the specified period long normal or default short before adjusting the distance to the subject This prevents the camera from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by objects passing through the frame AF AFE Short The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance off to the subject changes Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in quick succession a5 AF Activation This option controls whether both the shutter release button and the AF ON button can be used to initiate autofocus or whether autofocus is only initiated when the AF ON button is pressed Option Description Shutter AF ON default Autofocus can be performed with the AF ON button or by pressing the shutter release button halfway AF ON only Autofocus can only be performed using the AF 0N button 308 a6 Focus Point Illumination The options in this menu control whether or not the focus points are illuminated Option Description Manual focus mode Choose On the default setting to display the active focus point in manual focus mode Continuous mode Choose On the default setting to display the active focus point in CH continuous high speed and CL continuous low speed modes 309 310 a7 Focu s Point Wrap Around Choose whether focus point select
89. Nikon DIGITAL CAMERA Da A User s Manual Where to Find It Find what you re looking for from Q The Q amp A Index pp iv ix Know what you want to do but don t know the function name Find it from the question and answer index The Table of Contents pp x xvii Find items by function or menu name The Quick Start Guide pp 23 24 A brief guide for those who want to get started taking pictures right away The Index pp 438 444 Search by key word Error Messages pp 409 416 If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor find the solution here Troubleshooting pp 402 408 Camera behaving unexpectedly Find the solution here A For Your Safety Before using the camera for the first time read the safety instructions in For Your Safety pg xviii Digitutor Digitutor a series of watch and learn manuals in movie form is available from the following website http www nikondigitutor com index_eng html Package Contents Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera Memory cards are sold separately LI D3 digital camera pg 3 L BF 1A body cap pp 4 387 LJ BS 2 accessory shoe cover pg 3 1 EN EL4a rechargeable Li ion battery with terminal cover pp 32 34 L MH 22 quick charger with power cable and two contact protectors pp 32 433 T UC E4 USB cable pp 256 264 C1 USB cable clip pg 259 1 EG D2 audio video cable pg 274 LI AN D
90. Option Default d1 Beep pg 319 Off Shooting speed pg 320 d2 Continuous high speed 9 fps Continuous low speed 5 fps d3 Max continuous release pg 320 130 d4 File number sequence pg 321 On Control panel viewfinder pg 322 d5 Rear control panel ISO sensitivity Viewfinder display Frame count d6 Shooting info display pg 323 Auto d7 LCD illumination pg 324 Off d8 Exposure delay mode pg 324 Off e1 Flash sync speed pg 325 1 250 s e2 Flash shutter speed pg 326 1 60 s e3 Modeling flash pg 326 On e4 Auto bracketing set pg 327 AE amp flash e5 Auto bracketing Mode M pg 328 Flash speed e6 Bracketing order pg 329 MTR gt under gt over 421 Option Default fil Multi selector center button pg 330 Shooting mode Select center focus point Playback mode Thumbnail on off f N Multi selector pg 331 Do nothing f w Photo info playback pg 331 Info amp Playback amp f4 Assign FUNC button pg 331 FUNC button press None FUNC button dials Choose image area Assign preview button pg 337 f5 Preview button press Preview Preview command dials None Assign AE L AF L button pg 338 f6 AE L AF L button press AE AF lock AE L AF L command dials None Customize command dials pg 339 R
91. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX available separately pg 387 or the clean image options available in some third party imaging applications m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional Speedlights should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced 397 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions Do not drop The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration Keep dry This product is not waterproof and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage Avoid sudden changes in temperature Sudden changes in temperature such as occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day can cause condensation inside the device To prevent condensation place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature 398 Keep away f
92. Reset shooting menu 293 defaults How do I restore Custom Setting Reset custom settings 303 defaults How do I change the self timer delay Self timer delay 318 Can reverse the electronic analog Reverse indicators 343 exposure display Can display the menus in a different tangtage 347 language Can I save menu settings for use ona different Da camera Save load settings 355 BE Menus and Displays Question Key phrase See page How do I get more information on a Help 31 menu How do I use the menus Using the menus 26 What do these indicators mean Viewfinder control 8 10 What information is in the shooting panels shooting 12 14 information display information display What does this warning mean Error messages and 409 displays How much charge does the battery have Battery level 48 left How do I get more information about the Battery info 353 battery vi Question Key phrase See page How do keep the file number from being reset when insert a new memory File nuimber seg ence 321 card How do I reset file numbering to zero How do I clean the camera or lens Cleaning the camera 390 BE Taking Photographs Question Key phrase See page How many more shots can take with this Number of exposures 49 card remaining How do take bigger photographs How can I get more photos on the Image quality and size 65 69 memory card Can I control how the camera focu
93. Settings Custom Settings are used to customize Custom Setting groups camera settings to suit individual preferences In addition to Custom S priority selection Settings Custom setting bank and By iocus teatro whoa Reset custom settings settings in Fees urination the Custom Settings menu are divided par it leon AFS b Metering exposure 13 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 1 3 b3 EV steps for exposure comp 1 3 b4 Easy exposure compensation OFF b5 Center weighted area 12 b6Fine tune optimal exposure c1 Shutter release button AEL OFF c2 Auto meter off delay Ds into the six groups shown at right Main menu mey g c Timers AE lock OFF c2 Auto meter off delay c3 Self timer delay c4 Monitor off delay a Autofocus b Metering exposure a Beon a2 Shooting speed Cc Timers AE lock 43 Max continuous release d4 File number sequence MeCN Gf d Shooting display OFF d2 Shooting speed 8 43 Max continuous release 130 a4 File number sequence ON a5 Control panel viewfinder 8 6 Shooting info display AUTO aT LCD illumination OFF 48 Exposure delay mode OFF MECN G Bracketing flash eiFlashsyncspeed L Flash shutter speed 1 60 Modeling flash ON Auto bracketing set a eS Auto bracketing Mode M 4 2 Bracketing order N R ABCA Rename Custom setting Reset custom i bank pg 303 settings pg 303 f Controls 41 Multi selector center button L E 2 Multi
94. Shooting Data Page 3 Van a T NO SE REDUC HI ISO LONG EXP N 4 5 ACT D LIGHT NORMAL 6 RETOUCH D LIGHTING WARM TONE CYANOTYPE TRIM 7 SPRING HAS COME SP RING HAS COME 3636 1 Voice Memo ICON esses 248 6 Retouch History eens 2 Protect status as 7 Image comment 3 Retouch indicator 8 Camera name 4 High ISO noise reduction 299 9 Folder number frame Long exposure noise number 2Z sssssecccsssseccccseseecseceees 293 TECUCCTION eessccssecsssseeccsseeerssseees 299 5 Active D Lighting 185 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 282 2 Displayed in yellow with image area icon if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 E was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu 237 EE GPS Data 4 35 35 971 A 5 2 139 43 696 6 35m 7 15 12 2007 01 15 56 8 105 17 1 Voice MEMO ICON 248 7 Coordinated Universal Time 244 UTC 360 8 Heading 9 Camera name 2 Protect status 3 Retouch indicator 4 Latitude 5 Longitude 10 Folder number frame 6 Altitude NUIMD EL Fn sesssssseseccccccenssesseeseenee 293 1 Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken pg 223 2 Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass 3 Displayed in yellow with image area icon if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 al was selected for the Image area
95. System DCF is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera e DPOF Digital Print Order Format DPOF is an industry wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card e Exif version 2 21 The camera supports Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras version 2 21 a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif compliant printers e PictBridge A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer e HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI compliant devices via a single cable connection the camera uses a type A connector Battery Life The number of shots that can be taken with a fully charged EN EL4a battery 2 500 mAh varies with the condition of the battery temperature and how the camera is used Sample figures are given below e CIPA standard Approximately 4 300 shots Measured at 23 C 73 4 F 2 C 3 6 F with an AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED lens under the following test conditions lens cycled from infinity to minimum range a
96. T TL Flash Control When a CLS compatible flash unit is set to TTL the camera automatically selects one of the following types of flash control i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Flash unit emits series of nearly invisible preflashes monitor preflashes immediately before main flash Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by 1 005 segment RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and ambient background lighting If type G or D lens is used distance information is included when calculating flash output Precision of calculation can be increased for non CPU lenses by providing lens data focal length and maximum aperture see pg 220 Not available when spot metering is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard level brightness of background is not taken into account Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details or when exposure compensation is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected Flash Modes The camera supports the following flash modes Flash mode Description t Front curtain This mode is recommended for most situations In programmed auto and aperture priority auto modes shutter speed
97. a CLS compatible flash unit Mount an SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 or SU 800 on the camera accessory shoe 3 Set the flash unit to TTL or AA mode Turn the flash unit on and set the flash mode to TTL or AA See the Speedlight instruction manual for details 201 4 Focus Position the subject in the _ center of the frame and press v the shutter release button oc halfway to focus 5 Lock flash level After confirming that the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder press the Fn button The flash will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate flash level Flash output will be locked at this level 12 and FV lock icons mema and will 45 appear in the top control panel and AF S _ REM viewfinder 6 Recompose the photograph eaP 60 35 200 633 7 Take the photograph Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot If desired additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock 202 8 Release FV lock Press the Fn button to release FV lock Confirm that the FV lock icons ea and B are no longer displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder 4 Metering The metering areas for FV lock are as follows Speedlight Flash mode Metered area i TTL 5 mm circle in center of frame Stand alone flash unit AA Area metered by flash exposure meter i TTL Entire fi Used with other
98. ached area can be selected using weighted i z Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area pg 315 Classic meter for Center weight area portraits t Camera meters circle 4 mm 0 16 in in diameter approximately 1 5 of eS frame Circle is centered on current z focus point making it possible to meter Nos E CJ off center subjects if non CPU lens is Spot used or if auto area AF is in effect pg 76 camera will meter center focus Spot metering area point Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed even when background is much brighter or darker t When non CPU lens is attached average for entire frame will be used if Average is selected for Custom Setting b5 otherwise center weighted metering for non CPU lenses will use 12 mm circle in center of viewfinder regardless of setting selected for Non CPU lens data t For improved precision with non CPU lenses specify lens focal length and maximum aperture in Non CPU lens data menu pg 220 114 To choose a metering method Metering selector press the metering selector lock lock button button and rotate the metering selector until the desired mode is displayed 3D Color Matrix II Metering In matrix metering exposure is set using a 1005 segment RGB sensor Use a type Gor Dlens for results that include range information 3D color matrix metering Il see page 380 for information on lens types With other CPU lenses 3D r
99. al NE NORM BASIC JPEG Rear control panel NEF RAW Recording The NEF RAW recording item in the shooting menu controls compression pg 68 and bit depth pg 68 for NEF RAW images JPEG Compression JPEG images can be compressed for relatively uniform file size or optimal image quality The JPEG compression option in the shooting menu can be used to choose the type of compression pg 67 NEF RAW JPEG If only one memory card is used only the JPEG image will be displayed when photographs taken at NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic are viewed on the camera Deleting the JPEG image deletes the NEF RAW copy If two memory cards are inserted and RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 is selected for Slot 2 deleting the JPEG copy from the memory card in slot 2 has no effect on the NEF RAW copy on the memory card in slot 1 pg 71 The Image Quality Menu Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option in the shooting menu pg 290 BE The JPEG Compression Menu The JPEG compression item in the shooting menu offers the following options for JPEG images Option Description Images are compressed to produce relatively iii size priority uniform file size Quality varies with scene default recorded Optimal quality Optimal image quality File size varies with scene recorded 67 BE The NEF RAW Recording Menu Type The NEF RAW recording
100. amps Charge state lamp 50 80 100 Less than 50 of maximum capacity X blinks 3 blinks off off 50 80 of maximum capacity E blinks glows 3 blinks off More than 80 but less than 100 of 2 blinks glows glows blinks maximum capacity 100 of maximum capacity O glows off off off Charging is complete when the chamber lamp stops blinking and the charge lamps turn off About two hours and twenty five minutes are required to fully charge an exhausted battery 5 Remove the battery when charging is complete Remove the battery and unplug the charger Calibration See page 433 for more information on calibration 33 Insert the Battery 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries 2 Remove the battery chamber cover Lift the battery chamber cover latch turn it to the open 8 position D and remove the BL 4 battery chamber cover 3 Attach the cover to the battery If the battery release is positioned so that the arrow 4 is visible slide the battery release to cover the arrow Insert the two projections on the battery into the matching slots in the cover and slide the battery release to reveal the arrow The BL 4 Battery Chamber Cover The battery can be charged with the BL 4 attached To prevent dust from accumulating inside the battery
101. an be modified to suit the scene or the user s creative intent Choose a balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust or make manual adjustments to individual settings Sharpening Y Contrast Brightness T F Saturation Hue CA CHOK WReset 1 Select a Picture Control Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Set Picture Control menu pg 168 and press gt es Set Picture Control 10 ED Standard ENL Neutral HEV Vivid EMC Monochrome e QGrid GAdiust 2 Adjust settings Press A or W to highlight the desired setting and press lt or gt to choose a value pg 171 Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted or E Vivid a Quick adjust Sharpening m Y Contrast o Brightness o Saturation a EA GQGrid COOK Reset i select Quick adjust pg 171 to choose a preset combination of settings Default settings can be restored by pressing the button 3 Press Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk in the Set Picture Control menu 170 es Set Picture Control 6 ED Standard E GAdiust Bl Picture Control Settings Option Description Quick adjust Choose from options between 2 and 2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control note that this resets all manual adjustments For example ch
102. anage Picture Control C saeit menu highlight Load save N E and press gt R 2 2 Select Copy to camera E Manage Picture Control 10 Load save Highlight Copy to camera and L COPY tO camera press P A errr Copy to card 3 Select a Picture Control Manage Picture Control E Copy to camera Highlight a custom Picture CIOPNEUTAL 02 Control and either A bp e e press to view current Picture Control settings or Ty STANDARD 02 Le e press to proceed to Step 4 HH Sharpening Y Contrast Brightness 1 Saturation Hue GaQGrid Done Confirm 4 Select a destination Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt Manage Picture Control ECT Unused 5 Name the Picture Control Name the Picture Control as described on page 176 The new Picture Control will appear in the Picture Control list and can be renamed at any time using the Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu Use Slot 1 Set Picture Control Standard 7 Neutral Vivid Monochrome VIVID 02 L ECA STANDARD 02 GQGrid GAdiust E Manage Picture Control Le Y Save edit Delete amp Load save Slot 1 is used when saving custom Picture Controls to a memory card or copying custom Picture Controls to the camera Cards in slot 2 can not be used 179 180 EE Saving Custom Picture Controls to the Memory Card 1 Select Copy to card T Manage Pictu
103. ange information is not included color matrix metering II Color matrix metering is available when focal length and maximum aperture of non CPU lens are specified using Non CPU lens data item in setup menu see page 220 center weighted metering is used if focal length or aperture is not specified See Also For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center weighted metering see Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area pg 315 For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method see Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure pg 315 115 116 Exposure Mode Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture when adjusting exposure Four modes are available programmed auto F shutter priority auto 5 aperture priority auto A and manual M Mode Description Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for Programmed pane optimal exposure Recommended for snapshots pg 118 and in other situations in which there is little time p9 to adjust camera settings Shutter priority User chooses shutter speed camera selects 5 auto aperture for best results Use to freeze or blur pg 120 motion User chooses aperture camera selects shutter Aperture SA speed for best results Use to blur background for A priority auto pg 122 portraits or bring both foreground and i background into focus for
104. atrix metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed 5 Center Center weighted metering is activated while the Fn weighted button is pressed o Spot Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed Option Description Virtual The electronic analog exposure displays act as a tilt horizon meter pg 333 None No operation is performed when the Fn button is default pressed This option can not be used in combination with FUNC button dials pg 334 Selecting this options displays a message and sets FUNC button dials to None If another option is selected for FUNC button dials while this setting is active FUNC button press will be set to Nonel Virtual Horizon When Virtual horizon is selected for FUNC button press the electronic analog exposure displays in the viewfinder and top control panel act as a horizontal level when the Fn button is pressed Camera tilted right Camera level Camera tilted left Wile ds A K M N A Sa Control panel Viewfinder Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back 333 334 HE FUNC Button Dials Selecting FUNC button dials for Custom Setting f4 displays the following options Option Description The Fn button and main command dial can be used Choose a to select the image area pg 60 The imag
105. ay to focus then press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the photograph View the photograph pg 57 10 Delete unwanted photos pg 58 Press t twice to delete the current photograph T button Tutorial This section describes how to use the camera menus how to ready the camera for use and how to take your first pictures and play them back FinStsSt Sins ssecccsscsccessesssesccrrsecrsssceeterturcietrssneaiteeeersastivees Charge the Battery Insert the Battery Attach a Lens BaSiGSetu oae eaaa a T terete rete Inserta Memory Card eecssescsssscssscssescssccccsscesscccsseecsseceseeesseeessseeets Adjust Viewfinder Focus Basic Photography and Playback 25 26 Camera Menus Most shooting playback and setup options MENU button can be accessed from the camera menus To view the menus press the MENU button Tabs Choose from playback shooting Custom Settings setup retouch and My menus see following page Slider shows position in current menu Current settings are shown by icons Menu options Options in current menu 9 If 2 icon is displayed help for current item can be viewed by pressing O n button pg 31 BE Menus The following menus are available Menu Description Playback So playback settings and manage pho
106. ayed adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu R Reset Custom Settings Choose whether to restore default settings for the current Custom Settings bank See page 420 for a list of default settings Custom Settings are not reset when a two button reset is performed Option Description Yes Restore defaults for the current Custom Settings bank No default Exit without changing Custom Settings 303 304 a Autofocus a1 AF C Priority Selection This option controls whether Focus mode selector photographs can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority or only when the camera is in focus focus priority in continuous servo AF To select continuous servo AF rotate the focus mode selector to C Option Description Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release default button is pressed Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in _ Release ek focus In continuous mode frame rate slows for improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator ml Focus is displayed Regardless of the option selected focus will not lock when the in focus indicator is displayed a2 AF S Priority Selection This option controls whether Focus mode selector photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus focus
107. ayed by the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 338 81 Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions or the in focus indicator may be displayed allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus In these cases use manual focus pg 83 or use focus lock pg 80 to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph There is little or no contrast between the subject and the background Example subject is the same color as the background The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera Example subject is inside a cage The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns Example a row of windows in a skyscraper The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness Example subject is half in the shade Background objects appear larger than the subject Example a building is in the frame behind the subject The subject contains many fine details Example a field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness 82 Manual Focus Manual focus is available for Focus mode l
108. balance will make photographs slightly colder but will not actually make them blue Mired Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures For example a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K Mired calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106 is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account and as such is the unit used in color temperature compensation filters E g e 4000 K 3000 K a difference of 1000 K 83 mired e 7000 K 6000 K a difference of 1000 K 24 mired 149 150 HE The WB Button At settings other than I Choose color temp and PRE Preset manual the WB button can be used to fine tune white balance on the amber A blue B axis pg 148 to fine tune white balance when Mf or PRE is selected use the shooting menu as described on page 147 Six settings in both directions are available each increment is equivalent to about 5 mired pg 149 Press the WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the rear control panel Rotating the sub command dial to the left increases the amount of amber A Rotating the sub command dial to the right increases the amount of blue B At settings other than 0 a lt gt icon appears in the rear control panel eco a WB button Sub comman
109. ber for about a second The time needed to calibrate the battery is shown by the Chamber lamps green om _ao Charge lamps green Calibration lamps yellow CHARGE 100 O 6h 80 O 4h 50 O 2h l charge and calibration lamps Calibration buttons Approximate time needed Calibration Charge lamps to recalibrate battery lamp 2h 4h 6h Over 6 hours O glows O glows O glows O glows 4 6 hours O glows O glows glows off 2 4 hours O glows O glows off off Under 2 hours O glows off off off When calibration is complete the calibration and charge lamps will turn off and charging will begin immediately Although calibration is recommended for accurate measurement of battery charge state calibration need not be performed when the calibration lamp blinks Once begun calibration can be interrupted as desired e If the calibration button is not pressed while the calibration lamp is blinking normal charging will begin after about ten seconds e To interrupt calibration press the calibration button again Calibration will end and charging will begin 433 434 vV Battery Warning If the chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when no battery is inserted there is a problem with the charger If the chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when a battery is inserted a problem has occurred wit
110. ccsseccsseescsseesssseccstecssseseecsseeessees 354 Save Load Settings GPS EEE EE EEEN EE Virtual HOLIZOM isisisi Non CPU Lens Data 357 AF Fine Tune 358 Firmware VEPSiION ssssseesssessssessssesssesssssssseesssesses 359 K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies 360 DeLighting ssscsesssscessccasscososesntadseesevsecesnaisscusabionesenendechovaversessastata 363 Red Eye Correction ssssscssssssssssscsssescssssecsssescesnecsssseeesaecssnees 364 TMU PN AEE E E N E Monochrome ia Filter Effects scsscascssssssensessscavsdssssavonsssevenduasesenvaasuevediadatvccesbatesinebe GOlOr Bal M CE saissesssncsssisersiscossnnssssentsnsvoenestaasagacebvessentnsiasacseoneines Image Overlay a Side by Side COMparisSon sssssssssssssersssssssresssssrressssssnrenssseneesss 371 i My Menu Creating a Custom MenU ssssssssssssssssssssesrssssssessssse 373 Adding Options to My Menu 373 Deleting Options from My Menu 375 Reordering Options in My Menu sssssssscsssecssseecesseesceneeeeee 376 Technical Notes 377 Compatible Lenses oo eeessesssssssssssccsssecssccsssccessecsstecsssessasccsseeesnscessess 378 Other ACC SSOMICS eessssscsssssecssssecesseccsnseecesssecssnseeesnssecesnteessnseeeeass 383 Caring for the Camera sssscsssscccssseccssssecessssecssssersnseccsneccsnsseesee 390 SHOPS sscsecssnssscesesnsenvssszasccnaaconsononseccsennansnvapestaaconscedesnjesbeodugeonsennagers 390 CI GGA EE E E EN 390
111. ce bracketing In exposure bracketing pg 135 the camera varies exposure compensation with each shot while in the case of flash bracketing pg 135 flash level is varied with each shot i TTL and in the case of the SB 800 auto aperture flash control modes only see pages 190 and 192 Only one photograph is produced each time the shutter is released meaning that several shots are required to complete the bracketing sequence Exposure and flash bracketing are recommended in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure and there is not enough time to check results and adjust settings with each shot In white balance bracketing pg 139 the camera creates multiple images each time the shutter is released each with a different white balance adjustment Only one shot is required to complete the bracketing sequence White balance bracketing is recommended when shooting under mixed lighting or experimenting with different white balance settings See Also At default settings the camera varies both exposure and flash level Custom Setting e4 Auto bracketing set pg 327 is used to choose the type of bracketing performed EE Exposure and Flash Bracketing 1 Select flash or exposure bracketing Perazzi Choose the type of bracketing to be ATR AE aan performed using Custom Setting e4 ht Auto bracketing set pg 327 Choose We WB bracketing AE amp flash to vary both exposure and flash level the default setting AE
112. ce the lens or body cap M Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised the curtain will close automatically To prevent damage to the curtain observe the following precautions e Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised e If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised a beep will sound and the self timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes End cleaning or inspection immediately m Foreign Matter on the Low Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low pass filter during production and shipping The D3 however is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged Once inside the camera this foreign matter may adhere to the low pass filter where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions To protect the camera when no lens is in place be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap Should foreign matter find its way onto the low pass filter clean the filter as described above or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel
113. choose the desired shutter speed Shutter speed can be set to x 250 the flash sync speed limit or to values between 30s 3 9 and s 000 s aaa Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects high shutter speeds to freeze motion Fast shutter speed 1 000 s Slow shutter speed 1 10 s Shutter speed can be locked at the selected setting see page 127 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot See Also See page 411 for information on what to do if flashing tus ti indicator appears in the shutter speed displays 121 PN ned 122 A Aperture Priority Auto In aperture priority auto you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in aperture priority auto 1 Select exposure mode A Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until A is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel MODE button 2 Choose an aperture Rotate the sub command dial to choose the desired aperture from values between the minimum and maximum for the lens ba ra AF S REM fon GE SYTt d Sub command dial Small apertures high f numbers increase depth of field see page 117 bringing both foreground and background into focus Large apertures low f numbers soften background details in portrait
114. compatible remote flash units will emit a modeling flash when the camera depth of field preview button is pressed pg 117 No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected e4 Auto Bracketing Set Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing pg 134 is in effect Choose AE amp flash AE the default setting to perform both exposure and flash level bracketing AE only AE to bracket only exposure Flash only 4 to perform only flash level bracketing or WB bracketing WB to perform white balance bracketing pg 139 Note that white balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG 327 328 e5 Auto Bracketing Mode M This option determines which settings are affected when AE amp flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e4 in manual exposure mode Option Description geil Flash speed gt default Camera varies shutter speed Custom Setting e4 set to AE only or shutter speed and flash level Custom Setting e4 set to AE amp flash PE Flash speed aperture Camera varies shutter speed and aperture Custom Setting e4 set to AE only or shutter speed aperture and flash level Custom Setting e4 set to AE amp flash Camera varies aperture Custom Setting e4 set to 7 0 ee AE only or aperture and flash level Custom p Setting e4 set to AE amp flash 4 Flash only Camera varies flash level
115. con is displayed when FX format 36 x 24 is selected 232 EE RGB Histogram 1 Voice MEMO icon s sssssssseossssse 248 6 Histogram RGB channel In all 2 Protect status vce 244 histograms horizontal axis gives 3 Retouch indicator 360 pixel brightness vertical axis number of pixels 4 highlight fi mage highlights areas of image 7 Current channel that may be overexposed are f marked by a flashing border 8 Histogram red channel 4 5 Folder number frame 9 Histogram green channel NUMDE PB ve eeccsecsssessseesssessseesssseess 293 10 Histogram blue channel 4 1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode pg 282 2 Highlights can be displayed separately for each color channel Press lt or gt while pressing EQ button to cycle through channels as follows RGB R _ G B all channels red green blue Highlight display off 3 Displayed in yellow with image area icon if DX format 24 x 16 or 5 4 30 x 24 4 was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu 233 4 Some sample histograms are shown below e If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses the distribution of tones will be relatively even e If the image is dark tone distribution will be shifted to the left e If the image is bright tone distribution will be shifted to the eA right i E gt eee a aS Increasing expos
116. csneesseesseesseessees 196 Flash MOCeS ccssssssssssssssscsssessscsssecsscsssecsnssssessnccnseessccssessnccnseesecssseessees 197 xii FEV OGM EEEREN E EEEE REE E T 201 Plash Contactnsesndaiinidia ana 204 Other Shooting Options 205 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings ssssss sssss 206 Multiple EXpOSuUre sscssscssscccssccsssscsseccescccescessseecsscesssecsneecsnsecsnseesees 208 Interval Timer Photography sssssssssssssssssssssessesssssesessssstsesssstsnesssssee 213 NOM CPU LGMSES seissscccssssicassssccessdesdensessssctecsusssssecsbscrsacetsoniectsostsctnessess 220 USING 2 GPS UNIT ws essssssesssesssesssesssesssssssesssssssessnsssseesesssesssesses 223 More About Playback 227 Full Frame Playback ssssssssssscsssseesssseccsssseesnssecssssecessseessnsnecesaseees 228 Photo INFOrmation essessccssssecssssecssssecessssecsssseeesssecessseessnsneeesaeeees 231 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback 0 eee 241 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM sssssssssssssccseeeecsseeeessses 243 Protecting Photographs from Deletion seccssssscessseescnsees 244 Deleting Individual Photographs qu ssssssssessseecsneeesecnsesenseess 245 Voice Memos 247 Recording VOICE MEMOS cssesecssssecesssecessssecssssecessseeesnseessnsnecesnneess 248 Playing Voice M MOS ssesscssssecssssscessssecssssecssssecessseecsnseecesnsecesnneees 253 Connections 255 CONNECTING TO A COMPUTE eesesssessseesseseesseesseesss
117. ct and repeat the process from step 1 vV Image Dust Off Reference Data The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera histograms and highlights EMPERE are not displayed 352 Battery Info View information on the battery currently E Battery info inserted in the camera Bat meter Pic meter gg Calibration 4 E Charging life 0 4 2 Done Item Description Bat meter The current battery level expressed as a percentage Pic meter The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph for example when measuring preset white balance Calibration e CAL Due to repeated use and recharging calibration is required to ensure that battery level can be measured accurately recalibrate battery before charging pg 433 e Calibration not required Charging life A five level display showing battery age 0 1 indicates that battery performance is unimpaired 4 f that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced Note that batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 C 41 F may show a temporar
118. cters long Any characters after the 19th will be deleted After entering the name press The Set Picture Control new Picture Control will appear in the c Es Standard Picture Control list IC Monochrome Fact V1V1D 02 ro e EA GAdiust Custom Picture Controls can be renamed PErTEAE at any time using the Rename optionin the Manage Picture Control menu Savel iit Load save Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls are not affected by Reset shooting menu pg 293 Custom Picture Controls do not have a Quick adjust option pg 171 Custom Picture Controls based on Monochrome have Filter effects and Toning options in place of Saturation and Hue controls The Original Picture Control Icon The Nikon Picture Control on which the custom Original Picture Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon Control icon in the top right corner of the edit display gt VIVID 02 a s Contrast Brightness z Saturation Hue E EDGrid ONOK Reset 177 178 Sharing Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls created using ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software BE Copying Custom Picture Controls to the Camera 1 Select Load save i Manage Picture Control Le In the M
119. ctures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card Option Description Select set Hide or reveal selected pictures Deselect all Reveal all pictures 7 Protected and Hidden Images Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image Display Mode Choose the information available in the Display mode playback photo information display z pg 231 Press A or W to highlight an BS vious option then press gt to select the option for aiRwaianimn O RGB histogram the photo information display A V appears aaa next to selected items to deselect highlight and press To return to the playback menu highlight Done and press Option Description Basic photo info Highlights Highlights are shown by blinking border in photo information display Focus point Active focus point or in single servo AF focus point where focus first locked is shown in red in photo information display No focus point is displayed if camera was unable to focus using continuous servo autofocus or if continuous servo autofocus was used with auto area AF o etailed photo info RGB Red green and blue histograms are displayed in photo histogram information display Shooting data pages including camera name Data metering exposure focal length white balance and image options appear in photo
120. cus points 24 34mm AF lens 35 49 mm AF lens ooooo 00000 ooooo a ooooo ooooo ooooo o 50 105 mm AF lens oo 00000 a a In programmed auto the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to sensitivity ISO equivalency as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 5 5 6 7 1 8 10 11 For each one step increase in sensitivity e g from 200 to 400 aperture is stopped down by half an f stop If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens When an SC series 17 28 or 29 sync cable is used for off camera flash photography correct exposure may not be achieved in i TTL mode We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard i TTL flash control Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor In i TTL use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels as this may produce incorrect exposure M Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon Speedlights Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash Before using a Nikon Speedlight not listed in this section contact a Nikon authorized service representative for more information 195 196 i
121. d 0 to Presets d 1 d 4 Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d 0 to any of the other presets d 1 d 4 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu pg 144 and press gt White balance EI Choose color temp 2J PRE Preset manual gt 2 Select a destination Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press the center of the multi selector White balance A id 0 d 1 d 2 Y A PRE Select Set d 1 3 Copy d 0 to the selected preset Highlight Copy d 0 and press If comment has been created for d 0 pg 163 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset eS White balance E Preset manual et Set at Edit comment amp Select image Copy d 0 EE Copying White Balance from a Photograph d 1 d 4 Only Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the memory card to a selected preset d 1 d 4 only Existing white balance values can not be copied to preset d 0 1 Select PRE Preset es White balance manual C Flere Highlight Preset manual in d 2 cui the white balance menu pg E EI Choose color temp 144 and press gt ZIPRE Preset manual gt l 2 Select a destination E White balance Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press the center of the multi selector PRE Select Set 3 Choose Select
122. d dial Rear control panel Choosing a Color Temperature When I Choose color temp is selected for white balance color temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The color temperature is displayed in the rear control panel q e o e o e ISO QUAL WB mc OcA Rear control panel WB button Sub command dial M Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting Choose 4 Flash or gt Fluorescent for these sources With other light sources take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate The White Balance Menu Color temperature can also be selected in the white balance menu Note that the color temperature with the WB button and the sub command dial replaces the value selected in the white balance menu 151 Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast Two methods are available for setting preset white balance Method Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photograph and white balance is measured by camera pg 154 Direct measurement Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory photo
123. d for Custom Setting c4 3 Select the number of shots BS Multinle exoosure E Number of shots Press A or W to choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press 4 Select Auto gain Multiple exposure Le Highlight Auto gain and press Boca gt o cx Number of shots 2 Pa Auto gain ON gt 5 Set gain gt Multiple exposure E Auto gain Highlight one of the following options and press Option Description Gain adjusted according to number of exposures actually recorded gain for each exposure is set to 2 for 2 exposures 1 3 for 3 exposures etc Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure Recommended if background is dark On default Off 209 210 6 Select Done F Multiple exposure a Highlight Done and press Done i ca Number of shots A icon will be displayed in fe Auto sain an the top control panel To exit without taking a multiple exposure select Multiple Pp ie5 cr exposure gt Reset in the AFS REM shooting menu tan A Ha F Multiple exposure Le i i amp Frame a photograph focus and shoot In continuous high speed and continuous low speed release modes pg 86 the camera will record all exposures in a single burst In single frame release mode one photograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pre
124. d held mode was mistaken for sound of 2 shutter Photosnot recorded lh e Unless Release is chosen for 96 305 live view mode Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection shutter release is disabled if camera is unable to focus when focus mode S is selected in hand held mode Problem Solution Page e Choose lower ISO sensitivity or 108 299 Randomly spaced bright turn high ISO noise reduction on pixels noise appear in Shutter speed is slower than 1 s 299 photos use long exposure noise reduction Photos are blotched or e Clean lens smeared e Clean low pass filter 395 e Adjust white balance to match 144 Colors are unnatural light See e Adjust Set Picture Control 166 settings Can not measure white a de Subject is too dark or too bright 156 balance Image can not be selected as source for preset white Image was not created with D3 159 balance e NEF RAW or NEF JPEG image 65 White balance bracketing quality option selected for image unavailable quality a e Multiple exposure mode is in 211 effect 405 406 Problem Solution Page A auto is selected for Effects of Picture Control sharpening contrast or saturation differ from image to For consistent results over a series 172 image of photographs choose a setting other than A auto Metering cannot pe Autoexposure lock is in effect 131 changed Exposu
125. d off the lens aperture ring Aperture priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes P and 5 The exposure mode indicator F or 5 in the top control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder 381 382 Picture Angle and Focal Length The D3 can be used with Nikon lenses for 35mm 135 format cameras If Auto DX crop is on the default setting and a 35mm format lens is attached the picture angle will be the same as a frame of 35mm film 36 0 x 23 9 mm if a DX lens is attached the picture angle will automatically be adjusted to 23 5 x 15 6 mm DX format To choose a picture angle different from that of the current lens turn Auto DX crop off and select from FX format 36 x 24 DX format 24 x 16 and 5 4 30 x 24 If a 35mm format lens is attached the picture angle could be reduced by 1 5 x by selecting DX format 24 x 16 exposing a smaller area or the aspect ratio could be changed by selecting 5 4 30 x 24 FX format 36 x 24 picture size 36 0 x 23 9 mm equivalent to 35mm format camera Picture diagonal DX format 24 x 16 picture size 23 5 x 15 6 mm equivalent to DX format camera 5 4 30 x 24 picture size 30 0 x 23 9 mm Picture angle FX format 36 x 24 35mm format Picture angle DX format 24 x 16 DX format Picture angle 5 4 30 x 24 The DX format 24 x 16 picture angle is about 1 5 times s
126. de When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the A V out connector be sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard NTSC or PAL HDMI The camera is equipped with an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface connector allowing pictures to be played back on high definition televisions or monitors using a type A cable available separately from commercial suppliers Before connecting the camera to high definition device choose the HDMI format from the options below Option Description AUTO Auto default The camera automatically selects the appropriate format 480P 480p progressive 640 x 480 progressive format 576p 576p progressive 720 x 576 progressive format 720P 720p progressive 1 280 x 720 progressive format 1080i 1080i interlaced 1 920 x 1 080 interlaced format The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device is connected World Time Change time zones set the camera clock choose the date display order and turn daylight saving time on or off Option Description Choose a time zone The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the new time zone Date and time Set the camera clock pg 39 Choose the order in which the day month and year are displayed Turn daylight saving time on or off The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour The default setting is Off
127. display in the viewfinder pg 56 6s P_ieS F55 Plies F55 PL AF S REM AFS REM E77 AF S REM om Psroor MS Eum p eum mm GH Hl fom GY Hal mm a lc Exposure meters on Exposure meters off Exposure meters on The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 317 Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted the frame count and number of exposures remaining will be displayed some memory cards may only display this information when the camera is on Top control panel Adjust Camera Settings This tutorial describes how to take photos at default settings T Check camera settings Exposur 25 FSB AF S REM C7777 toon TG SYat i Image size White balance fiso sensitivity Image quality Top control panel Rear control panel Default settings are listed below Option Default Description Page Image NORM Record JPEG images at a compression ratio ualit JPEG of roughly 1 8 Ideal for snapshots 65 q y normal Size priority selected for JPEG compression Image size L FX format images are 4 256 x 2 832 pixels 69 Large in size Iso 200 ISO sensitivity digital equivalent of film 108 sensitivity speed set to ISO 200 White AUTO White balance is adjusted automatically for 144 balance Auto na
128. ds when reset is performed 419 420 EE Defaults Restored with Reset Custom Settings pg 303 Option Default a1 AF C priority selection pg 304 Release a2 AF S priority selection pg 305 Focus a3 Dynamic AF area pg 306 9 points a4 Focus tracking with lock on pg 308 Normal a5 AF activation pg 308 Shutter AF ON Focus point illumination pg 309 a6 Manual focus mode On Continuous mode On a7 Focus point wrap around pg 310 No wrap a8 AF point selection pg 310 51 points a9 AF ON button pg 311 AF ON a10 Vertical AF ON button pg 312 AF ON b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 313 1 3 step b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 313 1 3 step b3 EV steps for exposure comp pg 313 1 3 step b4 Easy exposure compensation pg 314 Off b5 Center weighted area pg 315 12mm Fine tune optimal exposure pg 315 b6 Matrix metering 0 Center weighted 0 Spot metering 0 c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 317 Off c2 Auto meter off delay pg 317 6s c3 Self timer delay pg 318 10s c4 Monitor off delay pg 318 20s Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom settings bank option will be reset pg 303 Settings in all other banks are unaffected
129. e cannot Ryne pnptos DPOF print service TIFF images only or transfer to computer and print using supplied software or Capture NX Photo isnot Choose correct video mode 346 displayed on TV 407 408 Problem Solution Page Photo is not displayed on high Confirm that HDMI cable available ae f 276 definition video separately is connected device Cani not Copy photos Choose correct USB option 257 to computer Photos not displayed Update software to latest version 387 in Capture NX Can not use Camera Control Pro 2 Set USB to MTP PTP 257 HE Miscellaneous Problem Solution Page Date of recording is Set camera clock 39 not correct Some options are not available at Menuitenicanhotbe certain combinations of settings Note that Battery info option is not available 353 selected when camera is powered by optional EH 6 AC adapter Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder top control panel and monitor Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page Lens aperture ringis Set ring to minimum FEE a not set to minimum aperture largest 38 blinks aperture f number lt a lt a Low battery Ready a fully charged 48 spare battery Ca CA blinks blinks Battery exhausted Replace battery 32 34 Contact Nikon lt 7 lt a Battery can no
130. e current picture in full screen press Q button To select the Om button current picture for printing ma Print set DPOF press the On button and press eer A The picture will be marked t Fiu Kom RA with a amp icon and the number T Ee of prints will be set to 1 a Es ure Keeping the Om button pressed press A or W to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Press when all the desired pictures have been selected Set EQZoom ONOK 3 Select imprint options ia Print set DPOF I Select set Highlight the following options and press gt to toggle the highlighted H option on or off to complete the print EC morint date order without including this information proceed to Step 4 e Data imprint Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order e Imprint date Print date of recording on all pictures in print order 4 Complete the print order wa Print set OPOP I Select set Highlight Done and press to complete the print order ao O Imprint date Done 1 Print Set To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer select Print DPOF in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in Printing Multiple Pictures to modify and print the current order pg 268 DPOF date and data imprint options are not supported when printing via direct USB connection to print th
131. e 4 shooting menu pg 290 and 2 x EA Colorspace Ee press gt N Active Dishing OFF 2 Long exp NR OFF al 2 Select acolor space E Color space Le Highlight the desired option M and press e ic ig Adobe Adobe RGB 187 188 Color Space Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that represent them in a digital image file The sRGB color space is widely used while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing sRGB is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management or when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint the direct printing option on some household printers or kiosk printing or other commercial print services Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using these options but colors will not be as vivid JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 compliant applications and printers that support Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 will select the correct color space automatically If the application or device does not support Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 select the appropriate color space manually An ICC color profile is embedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space allowing applications that support color management to automatically select the correct color space For more informa
132. e a USB option from ease Mass Storage MTP PTP default and Mass Storage as AEM OO described below Operating system Nikon Transfer Camera Control Pro 2 e Windows Vista 32 bit Home Basic Home Premium Business ia Choose Enterprise Ultimate editions MTP PTP or e Windows XP Home Edition Mass Storage Choose Professional g MTP PTP Mac 0S X version 10 3 9 or 10 4 10 Windows 2000 Professional RE i a See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on supported operating systems 1 Windows 2000 Professional Do nor select MTP PTP when using Nikon Transfer If MTP PTP is selected when the camera is connected the Windows hardware wizard will be displayed Click Cancel to exit the wizard and then disconnect the camera Be sure to select Mass Storage before reconnecting the camera 257 258 Direct USB Connection Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Select a USB option Before connecting the camera to the computer make sure the correct option is selected for the USB item in the camera setup menu pg 257 2 Turn the camera off Power switch fin D T ay 3 Turnthe computer on Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up 4 connect the USB cable Connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle
133. e angle as a 35mm format camera using a 3 2 aspect ratio it can also be used to record photographs with the smaller DX picture angle or the 5 4 aspect ratio pg 60 JPEG Compression Choose whether to compress JPEG images to a fixed size or to vary file size for improved image quality pg 67 NEF RAW Recording Choose compression and bit depth options for NEF RAW images pg 68 White Balance Adjust white balance settings pg 144 297 Set Picture Control Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to 298 instantly adjust image processing settings pg 166 Manage Picture Control Save and modify custom Picture Control combinations or copy custom Picture Controls to or from the memory card pg 174 Color Space Choose from sRGB and Adobe RGB color spaces pg 187 Active D Lighting This option can be used to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows pg 185 The default setting is Off Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction Choose whether to reduce noise in pictures taken at slow shutter speeds Option Description Photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 1s are processed to reduce noise While photographs are being com i S47 processed tab nar will blink in the shutter speed aperture displays for a period of time On approximately equal to the current shutter speed In continuous release mode frame rates will slow and the capacity of the m
134. e area image area i default can not be changed while shooting a multiple exposure pg 208 RO 1 step spd aperture If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are rotated changes to shutter speed exposure modes S and M and aperture exposure modes A and M are made in increments of 1 EV Choose non Non PU CPU lens number Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to choose a lens number specified using the Non CPU lens data option pg 220 e Focus point selection Press the Fn button and rotate the command dials for vertical shooting to choose a focus point pg 335 None No operation is performed when the command dials are rotated while the Fn button is pressed Portrait Tall Orientation Photographs To use the command dials to select the focus point when framing shots in portrait tall orientation 1 Choose Focus point selection Se 4 Assion FUNC button FUNC button dials Select Focus point selection for 4 ea Choose mage area E d Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC inc Choose rom CPU lens button gt FUNC button dials None Unlock the shutter release Vertical shutter release button button for vertical lock shooting io a 335 3 Select the focus point With the camera in portrait tall orientation select a focus point by pressing the Fn button and rotating the command dials
135. e date of recording on photographs in the current print order use the PictBridge Time stamp option The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW pg 65 can not be selected for printing using this option Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device after the print order is created 273 274 Viewing Photographs on TV The supplied EG D2 audio video A V cable can be used to connect the D3 to a television or VCR for playback or recording A type A High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources can be used to connect the camera to high definition video devices Standard Definition Devices To connect the camera to a standard television 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A V cable 2 Connect the supplied A V cable as shown Connect to camera Connect to video device 3 Tune the television to the video channel 4 Turn the camera on and press gt button During playback images will be displayed both on the television screen or recorded to video tape and the camera monitor Video Mode pg 346 Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the v
136. e depth of field preview button is pressed See page 326 for more information See Also See page 110 for information on auto ISO sensitivity control For information on using the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu for reducing noise at slow shutter speeds see page 299 For information on choosing the size of the increments available for shutter speed and aperture see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 313 For information on changing the roles of the main and sub command dials see Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Change main sub pg 339 117 F Programmed Auto In this mode the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in programmed auto 1 Select exposure MODE button mode F Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until F is displayed in the viewfinder and top Main command dial control panel 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot Shutter speed 1 320 5 Aperture f 9 118 Flexible Program In exposure mode F different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main command dial flexible program Rotate the command dial to th
137. e for exposure compensation press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is displayed in the viewfinder or top control panel button Main command dial CET Ce eT A E 0 EV 0 3 EV 2 0 EV G4 button pressed 132 Exposure compensation can be set to values between 5 EV underexposure and 5 EV overexposure in increments of 1 3 EV In general choose positive values to make the subject brighter negative values to make it darker 1EV No exposure 1 EV compensation At values other than 0 the 0 at the center of the electronic analog exposure displays will flash and a 4 icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel after you release the 4 button The current value for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the electronic analog exposure display by pressing the button Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation see Custom Setting b3 EV steps for exposure comp pg 313 For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the 4 button see Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation pg 314 133 134 Bracketing The camera offers three types of bracketing exposure bracketing flash bracketing and white balan
138. e frame advance rate for CL continuous low speed mode from values between 1 and 9 fps The default setting is 5 fps Continuous low speed d3 Max Continuous Release The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 130 The Memory Buffer Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d3 shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills See page 423 for more information on the capacity of the memory buffer d4 File Number Sequence When a photograph is taken the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is inserted in the camera Option Description On default When a new folder is created the memory card formatted or anew memory card inserted in the camera file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the current folder whichever is higher If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999 a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001 Off File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is inserted in the camera Note that a new folder is created automatica
139. e right for large apertures small f numbers that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that freeze motion Rotate the command dial to the left for small apertures large f numbers that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion All combinations produce the same exposure While flexible program is in effect an asterisk appears in the top control panel To restore default shutter speed and C _ AS Main command dial AF S REM foam A S44 P tbo F5 aperture settings rotate the command dial until the asterisk is no longer displayed choose another mode or turn the camera off Shutter speed 2 000 s Shutter speed 1 50 s Aperture f 3 5 Aperture f 22 See Also See page 426 for information on the built in exposure program 119 PN hee 120 5 Shutter Priority Auto In shutter priority auto you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in shutter priority auto 1 Select exposure MODE button mode amp Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until 5 is displayed in the aaa viewfinder and top Main command dial control panel 5 ie5 F5 6 2 Choose a shutter speed g eso AF S REM ZZ aan A S44 Rotate the main command dial to
140. e subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness e Across star filter or other special filter is used e The subject appears smaller than the focus point e The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns e g windows in a skyscraper e The subject is moving Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus Use an AF S lens The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters The Shooting Information Display To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode press the MA button Shooting information display Shooting information off p Shooting info histogram Framing guides 1 Only displayed during exposure preview tripod mode pg 99 2 Not displayed when view through lens is zoomed in Monitor Brightness Monitor brightness can be adjusted by pressing the A button while the view through the monitor is displayed Press A or W to adjust brightness note that monitor brightness has no effect on pictures taken in live view mode To return to live view release the button Monitor brightness can not be adjusted during exposure preview pg 99 HDMI When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device the camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display the view through the l
141. ect image Copy d 0 4 Edit the comment E White balance o 18Sa O t Edit the comment as described on page PRESITAN 292 MNOPQRSTUVWXYZI Cursor lnput OROK j 163 164 Image Enhancement This chapter describes how to optimize sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue using Picture Controls how to preserve detail in highlights and shadows using active D lighting and how to choose a color space Pict re Controls lt c s cccccscccecsssucesusstcsesstsesesecsssccseevessesss Creating Custom Picture Controls Active D Lighting eteten erete rattaat re tarea rents Eol CN o F 1E A E L A A 165 Picture Controls Nikon s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing settings among compatible devices and software Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings or make independent adjustments to sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue These settings can be saved under new names as custom Picture Controls to be recalled or edited at will Custom Picture Controls can also be saved to the memory card for use in compatible software and software created Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera Any given set of Picture Controls will produce nearly the same results on all cameras that support the Nikon Picture Control system 166 BE Using Picture Controls Picture Controls can be used as d
142. ed regardless of the setting selected for Non CPU lens data in the setup menu pg 220 When Average is selected the average of the entire frame will be used for both CPU and non CPU lenses b6 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure Use this option to fine tune the exposure value selected by the camera Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each metering method by from 1 to 1 EV in steps of 1 6 EV 1 Select Custom Setting b6 A b6 Fine tune optimal exposure Highlight Custom Setting b6 T Reose compensation can Fine tune optimal exposure dt ae Cortina and press gt p No 2 Select Yes f b6 Fine tune optimal exposure The message shown at right A i A will be displayed highlight Stated Ceti Yes and press to proceed _ or select No to exit without No altering exposure 315 316 3 Select a metering method E b6 Fine tune optimal exposure Highlight Matrix metering o Center weighted or Spot A Re 0 Spot metering 0 metering and press gt 4 Choose an exposure value gt b6 Fine tune optimal exposure e Matrix metering Press A or W to choose an exposure value from 1 to 1 EV Press to save changes and exit vV Fine Tuning Exposure Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and is not affected by two button resets Note that as the exposure compensation icon is not displayed the only way to determine how much exposure has been altered
143. educe blur Exposure delay mode 324 BE Viewing Photographs Question Key phrase See page Can view my photographs on the Camera playback 228 camera Can I view more information about Photo info 231 photos Why do parts of my photos blink Photo info highlights 232 282 vii viii Question Key phrase See page How do get rid of an unwanted photo Deleting individual 245 photos Can I delete several photos at once Delete 281 Can l zoom in on pictures to make sure Playback zoom 243 they re in focus Can protect photos from accidental Protect 244 deletion Can I hide selected photos Hide image 281 How do I tell if parts of my photos may be Display mode Sopa 282 overexposed highlights How do tell where the camera focused a modefocus 282 Can I view photos as they are taken Image review 287 Can I record a voice memo on photos Voice memo 251 Is there an automatic playback slide Slide show 288 show option HE Retouching Photographs Question Key phrase See page How do I bring out details in shadows D Lighting 363 Can I get rid of red eye Red eye correction 364 Can I crop photographs on the camera Trim 365 Can I create a monochrome copy of a Monochrome 366 photograph Can I create a copy with different colors Filter effects 367 Can I use camera to create JPEG copies of NEF RAW photographs Color palange 207 Can overlay two photos to ma
144. ee ISO QUAL WB mic SG WB button Main command dial Rear control panel wel d 0 3 Select direct measurement mode Release the WB button briefly and then press the button until the PRE icon starts to flash A flashing will also appear in the top control panel and viewfinder At default settings the displays will flash for about six i CEIA aP ITE seconds 1 P i5 56 200 PrE Viewfinder 4 Measure white balance Before the indicators stop flashing frame the A reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter release button all the way down The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset d 0 No photograph will be recorded white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus 155 5 Check the results 156 If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance Saad will flash in the control panels while the viewfinder will show a flashing Ga At default settings the displays will flash for about six seconds If lighting is too dark or too bright the camera may be unable to measure white balance A flashing na id will appear in the control panels and viewfinder at default settings the displays will flash for about six seconds Press the shutter release button halfway to return to Step 4 and measure white balance again
145. eed and Aperture LOCK cscsssscssescsseccssecsseeesneeesees 127 Autoexposure AE LOCK ssssssssssssssesssssssrsrssrssrsrssrssrsrssresrsresrsresresrse 129 Exposure COMpensation ssssssssssssessssssssesesessesssssseseseesrsssssssseseseess 132 Bie CCG ses scdedssccoe caccnsssscdaa hennsscesssssQponssecouss cdedu N 134 White Balance 143 White Balance Options csssecsssccsssessseccnscesssecsecsssecsneecsneecsneess 144 Fine Tuning White Balance ssssssccssssscesssccsnseecsnssecsnseeessseeeess 147 Choosing a Color Temperature un sreescsssescessseeecnseescnseescnnneeeensees 151 Preset Manual sssccssscssssccssccsssecsstecsssccsscccssccesscecsuccssnseesuccesseeesscessees 152 Image Enhancement 165 Picture CONTOIS eccsescsssscssscesssecssecessccssccesscccsscecsseccsnceesnccesseeessceesees 166 Creating Custom Picture CONtrONS scsssccssseccssessceseesesees 174 Active D LighN NG srira 185 COOK S PAC ss scssssacstscsczstensezes occaaseceasendcakcachesiucessdendaaniedasbecccnascadsstcetetas 187 Flash Photography 189 The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS seesccseesesnseees 190 Compatible Flash Units csssssssscsssesssscsseeccssccsssecsnscssteeesseeesseees 191 CLS Compatible Flash Units cesessssssscsssecsssscccsseesssseeeeenees 191 Other Flash Units cesssssssccssssccssesccsseecssssscesseesesutecssneeessnseesssees 194 i TTL Flash COntrol c ssssssssssssssssssscsssessessssesssessesssessss
146. een in the holder 391 5 Latch the screen holder Push the front edge of holder upward until it clicks into place v Replacing Focusing Screens Do not touch the surface of the mirror or focusing screens Framing Grids The display in type E focusing screens may be slightly out of position depending on how the focusing screen is placed 392 Replacing the Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by a CR1616 lithium battery with a life of about four years If the icon is displayed in the top control panel while the exposure meters are on the battery is running low and needs to be replaced When the battery is exhausted the icon will blink while the exposure meters are on Photographs can still be taken but will not be stamped with the correct time and date and interval timer photography will not function correctly Replace the battery as described below 1 Remove the main battery The clock battery chamber is located on the roof of the main battery chamber Turn the camera off and remove the EN EL4a battery Open the clock battery chamber Slide the clock battery chamber cover toward the front of the main battery chamber Remove the clock battery Insert the replacement battery Insert a new CR1616 lithium battery so that the positive side the side marked with and the battery name is visible 393 5 Close the clock bat
147. election is complete nai 3 10 100 3 5 Choose Select destination folder Y iSelect image s 100 a T c Highlight Select destination o Career e folder and press gt 284 6 Choose a selection method Highlight one of the following options and press gt ex Copy image s mj Select destination folder Select folder by number gt Select folder from list Option Description Enter number of destination PpO folder T Select folder by number Select folder A a 1010 by number 100 999 Move Set WOK Select destination folder from PENE Z list W Select folder from list g TOONC_D3 OW Select folder 101NC_D3 e 102NC_D3 from list 103NC_D3 7 Select a destination folder Enter the desired folder number or highlight the destination folder and press to select the folder and return to the Copy image s menu Select Copy image s Highlight Copy image s and press gt ma Cony image s Y iSelect image s 100 ca Select destination folder 101 F Copy image s 285 286 9 Select Yes ma Cory image s A confirmation dialog will be displayed Highlight Yes and p Sime press i 7 Copy image s vV Copy Image s Images can only be copied if there is sufficient space on the destination memory card Hidden pictures can not be copied If the destination folder contains a file with the same name as a file selected
148. emory buffer will drop Photographs can not be taken until processing is complete and jab mr has cleared from the displays Noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is turned off before processing is complete Off default Long exposure noise reduction off EA High ISO NR Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce noise Option Description HIGH High Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of Normal ISO 2000 and higher While photographs are being NORM default processed the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from LOW Low High Normal and Low Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of off HI 0 3 and higher The amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR 299 ISO Sensitivity Settings Adjust ISO sensitivity and ISO sensitivity auto control settings pp 108 110 Live View Choose a live view mode and the release mode that will be used when the camera is in live view mode pg 91 Multiple Exposure Create a single photograph from two to ten exposures pg 208 Interval Timer Shooting Take photographs automatically at pre selected intervals Use for time lapse movies of such subjects as flowers opening or butterflies emerging from cocoons pg 213 300 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera
149. en to 8 12 15 or 20 mm circle in center of frame or weighting based on average of entire frame non CPU lenses use 12 mm circle or average of entire frame e Spot Meters 4 mm circle about 1 5 of frame centered on selected focus point on center focus point when non CPU lens is used Range ISO 100 f 1 4 e Matrix or center weighted metering 0 20 EV lens 20 C 68 F e Spot metering 2 20 EV Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and Al Exposure mode Programmed auto with flexible program FP shutter priority auto 5 aperture priority auto A manual M Exposure compensation 5 5 EV in increments of 1 3 1 2 or 1 EV Exposure bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV Flash bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV 4 White balance 2 9 frames in steps of 1 2 or 3 bracketing 429 430 Exposure Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with AE L AF L button ISO sensitivity Recommended Exposure Index ISO 200 6400 in steps of 1 3 2 or 1 EV Can also be set to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 100 equivalent below ISO 200 or to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 ISO 12800 equivalent or 2 EV ISO 25600 equivalent above ISO 6400 Active D Lighting Can be selected from High Normal or Low Focus Autofocus Nikon Multi CAM 3500FX autofocus module with TTL phase detection fine tuning 51 focus p
150. en while the shutter release button is held down Use for long time exposure photographs of moving lights the stars night scenery or fireworks Nikon recommends using a fully charged EN EL4a battery or an optional EH 6 AC adapter to prevent loss of Shutter speed 35 s power while the shutter is open Note that Aperture f 25 noise and distortion may be present in long exposures before shooting choose On for the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu pg 299 See Also See Custom Setting f10 Reverse indicators pg 343 for information on reversing the electronic analog exposure display 126 Shutter Speed and Aperture Lock The M button can be used to lock shutter speed at the value selected in shutter priority auto or manual exposure mode or to lock aperture at the value selected in aperture priority auto and manual exposure modes Lock is not available in programmed auto HE Shutter Speed Lock To lock shutter speed at the selected value press the M button and rotate the main command dial until Ml icons appear in the viewfinder and the top control panel button Main command dial To unlock shutter speed press the M button and rotate the main command dial until the icons disappear from the displays AFS REM ton G aHa 127 BE Aperture Lock To lock aperture at the selected value press the Mf button and rotate the sub command dial until IN
151. ens as shown at right Remote Cords If the shutter release button on a remote cord available separately see pg 388 is pressed halfway for over a second in tripod mode it will activate contrast detect autofocus If the remote cord shutter release button is pressed all the way down without focusing focus will not be adjusted before the picture is taken 101 m 102 m Shooting in Live View Mode Although they will not appear in the final picture banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame Bright light sources may leave after images in the monitor when the camera is panned When shooting in live view mode avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed Live view mode can be used for up to an hour Note however that when used in live view mode for extended periods the camera may become noticeably warm and the temperature of its internal circuits may rise resulting in image noise and unusual colors To prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits live view shooting will end automatically before the camera overheats A count down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends At high ambie
152. enses that do not support selector autofocus non AF Nikkor lenses P O or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results pg 82 To focus manually set the focus mode selector to M and adjust the lens focusing ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus Photographs can be taken at any time even when the image is not in focus A M Selection Autofocus with Manual Priority If the lens supports A M selection set the lens A M switch to M manual If the lens supports M A autofocus with manual priority focus can be adjusted manually regardless of the mode selected with the lens See the documentation provided with your lens for details 83 84 The Electronic Rangefinder If the lens has a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus the focus point can be selected from any of the 51 focus points After positioning the subject in the selected focus point press the shutter release button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring until the in focus indicator is displayed pg 55 Note that with the subjects listed on page 82 the in focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and
153. er areas of image Use multi selector to view area not visible in monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame Rotate main command dial to view same View other nave location in other images at current zoom images ratio Change g See page 244 for more information protect status Return to Monitor will turn off Photographs can be shooting taken immediately mode Display See page 277 for more information menus 243 Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full frame zoom and thumbnail playback the O n button can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion Protected files can not be deleted using the t button or the Delete option in the playback menu Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted pp 45 345 To protect a photograph 1 Select an image Display the image in full frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list rae fi 100NC_D3 DSC_0001 JPG 15 12 2007 10 16 00 4256x2832 2 Press the On button The photograph will be marked with a amp icon To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be 100c D3 Hg a deleted display the p photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the Om button Voice Memos Changes to the protect stat
154. er than slow sync or select exposure mode A or M and choose a larger aperture 111 112 Exposure Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure This section describes the options available to control exposure including metering exposure mode exposure lock exposure compensation and bracketing Metern oee aeee e AASE AEEA er pg 114 Exposure MOCO wateccrecscccscce scseccorsccesesscssesctetsccceeceonsesseee pg 116 R Programmed Auton eea eaea teeter pg 118 S Shutter Priority AUtO ae a A E A AEA EAE pg 120 A Aperture Priority AUtO sesesseseeseeceecesceceocoseecoocoseoceocoseoceecosee pg 122 AMan AS pg 124 Shutter Speed and Aperture Lock scccsecsrsees pg 127 Autoexposure AE LOCK ccsccsssssssscsssecesseceecececees pg 129 Exposure COMPeNnsatiON ssscscsscsscescerssssecsaserceases pg 132 Bracketing meae aeea AAEE sctacusseceoeezs pg 134 113 Metering Metering determines how the camera sets exposure The following options are available Method Description rol Recommended in most situations Camera meters a wide area 3D color of the frame and sets exposure according to distribution of brightness color distance and composition for natural matrix Il results Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to area in center of d z frame defaults to 12 mm circle in a Center center of viewfinder if CPU lens is _ ae att
155. er release button is pressed In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture programmed auto aperture shutter priority auto or shutter speed aperture priority auto manual exposure mode When On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt ISO sensitivity auto control in shooting menu and no flash is attached the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing mode M pg 328 can be used to change how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter speed and or aperture or by varying flash level alone EE White Balance Bracketing 1 Select white bala
156. eras If Auto DX crop is off and FX format 36 x 24 or 5 4 30 x 24 is selected for Image area when a DX lens is attached the edges of the image may be eclipsed This may not be apparent in the viewfinder but when the images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the edges of the picture are blacked out a eras DX format 24 x 16 i T image circle DX format 5 4 FX format if oe ooo FX format 36 x 24 image circle The Viewfinder Display The DX format and 5 4 crops are shown below DX format 5 4 62 Image area can be set using the Image area option in the shooting menu or at default settings by pressing the Fn button and rotating the main command dial BE The Image Area Menu 1 Select Image area SHOOTING MENU Shooting menu bank f Highlight Image area in the z iyii File naming shooting menu pg 290 and press gt Image size Image area 2 Choose an option Le Highlight Auto DX crop or Choose image area and press gt Y Auto DX crop Lo Sa Choose image area 3 Adjust settings gt Image area 103 Choose image area Choose an option and press The selected crop is displayed in the viewfinder pg 62 ME FX format 36x24 63 64 HE The Fn Button The image area can be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating the main command dial until the desired crop is displayed in the viewfinder pg 62 This op
157. eration the default option for the Fn button and command dials Fnbutton Main as pg 334 can not be performed while a multiple exposure is being recorded pg 211 M Auto DX Crop The Fn button can not be used to select image area when a DX lens is attached and Auto DX crop is on The Fn Depth of Field Preview and AE L AF L Buttons Changes to image area settings can be made using the Fn button the default setting see Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 331 the depth of field preview button Custom setting f5 Assign preview button pg 337 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 338 Note that some button press options can not be combined with options using dials Information Display pg 14 At settings other than FX format 36 x 24 the current image area selection can be viewed by pressing the M button to display shooting information in the monitor i is displayed when il aa DX format 24 x 16 is selected and p4 when tals 5 4 30 x 24 is selected P_ig5 F55 EmA AFS E7 Image Size Image size varies with the option selected for image area Image Quality The camera supports the following image quality options Option Filetype Description Raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic Format NEF Use with images that will be
158. ers pg 208 Interval Timer Photography cscscscssscsesssscsees pg 213 NON CERUILENSES tick sccsccccccccesesestecetestescescecacssesseseseserecates pg 220 WSING AIGPSiU Mniteiecccrseccctececscecceecescsecctcecereseceescetesesesccees pg 223 205 206 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by holding the ISO and WB buttons down together for more than two seconds these buttons are marked by a green dot The control panels turn off briefly while settings are reset ISO WB button button Option Default Option Default Focus point Center Shutter speed Off Exposure mode Programmed Ei p auto Bracketing off Flexible program off Flash mode Front curtain Exposure off sync compensation FV lock off AE hold Off Multiple off Aperture lock Off exposure 1 Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 338 is unaffected 2 Number of shots is reset to zero Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV exposure flash bracketing or 1 white balance bracketing The following shooting menu options will also be reset Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset pg 291 Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected Option Default Option Default Image quality JPEG Normal White balance Auto Image size Large ISO sensitivity 200 F
159. es above 20 C 68 F Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 C 41 F the battery life indicator in the Battery info display may show a temporary decrease The battery may be hot immediately after use Wait for the battery to cool before recharging Use the charger with compatible batteries only Unplug when not in use Compatible Batteries The camera can also be used with EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries Removing the Battery Before removing the battery turn the camera off and lift the battery chamber cover latch turn it to the open Q position To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use Attach a Lens Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is removed T Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap oe After confirming that the camera is off remove the rear lens LE 2 Attach the lens Keeping the mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting mark on the camera body position the lens in the camera s bayonet mount Being careful not to press the lens release button rotate the lens counter clockwise until it clicks into place index If the lens is equipped with an A M or M A M switch select
160. escccceessssssss 49 Color temperature indicati seguon i 151 7 Memory card slot indicators 71 Image quality on eeeccseeeceseeeees 66 8 White balance bracketing IN d CAtOT sssssssssssrssssessssseesseseesseees 139 9 Voice memo recording indicator shooting mode 249 10 Voice memo status Indicator e eccesessessessesseeseee 251 252 11 Voice memo recording MOE innuna 249 12 White balance ecsccseeseees 144 White balance fine tuning INCICATOR se pniaun 150 11 12 The Viewfinder Display a goooOOOgqad ooooOOOogooo ooooooo0ooo0o0 0000000 21000 O00 959000 Se 1 12 mm reference circle for center weighted metering 114 2 AF area bracket uo 47 95 3 Focus points 78 310 Spot metering targets 114 4 Focus indicator 5 Metering essecssessesscscoreooeeosssee 6 Autoexposure AE lock 129 7 Exposure MOE sssssssssessssssssseee 116 8 Shutter speed lock icon 127 9 Shutter speed sss 120 124 10 Aperture lock ICON 128 11 Aperture f number 122 124 Aperture number of stops 123 381 12 ISO sensitivity indicator 108 16 Flash ready indicator 202 Auto ISO sensitivity 17 FV lock indicator uu 202 INdICAtOT ssssssssssssssssssesseesesseeeeeeees 110 18 Flash sync indicator cesses 325 13 ISO sensitivity PESISIRE PIERS EER 108 19 Aperture stop indicator 123 381 1
161. escribed below e Select Nikon Picture Controls pg 168 Select an existing Nikon Picture Control e Modify existing Picture Controls pg 170 Modify an existing Picture Control to create a combination of sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue for a particular scene or effect e Create custom Picture Controls pg 174 Store modified Picture Controls under unique names and recall or edit them as desired e Share custom Picture Controls pg 178 Custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be saved to the memory card for use in ViewNX supplied and other compatible software or software created custom Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera e Manage custom Picture Controls pg 181 Rename or delete custom Picture Controls Nikon Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied by Nikon are referred to as Nikon Picture Controls In addition to the Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera optional Picture Controls are available for download from Nikon websites Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Nikon Picture Controls Both Nikon and custom Picture Controls can be shared among compatible devices and software 167 Selecting Nikon Picture Controls The camera offers four preset Nikon Picture Controls Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene Option Description FISD Standard Standard processing for
162. esseccssesecsecsssuseecsseesesneeeses 8 The Rear Control Panel eessssscssssssccssseccssescecssecsenseeessneeeesnsecsenees 10 The Viewfinder Display ssssscssssccsssecssssseccseesesnseessneesesnecssaees 12 The Shooting Information Display ssssscsssssccsseceeseeseseees 14 The Command Dials ssscsssssccsseecessseccssescecsseecesuteessneeessnsecseaees 16 Quick Start Guide Tutorial 25 Camera MONS visisssscsssrstassscseesssaiessiasvessrascissesavsavesnsssevsansnstoevesnieassitcess 26 Using Camera Menus ssssssssscssescsessssseccssscsseccsseesnecsneecsseeenseesses 28 TS EE E E scassssttouates 31 First Steps eree r E E E E EE 32 Charge the Battery sescssssscsssssccsecssssseccsseccssusesssnseessueecseneeseas 32 Insert the Battery cecssssccssessccssecsssssccsecsesnsecssseeessatecsesseeeesseees 34 PAC I aI NAS 52 scare sacencdsteresactasnectevsceztsssescesttsestavasteanteeeteetenstoaeasiats 37 BASIC SORUP scscsscssscsiecsusisnsssanccciassecssodosescavessnssandecousadostedengisasecivecaensnatys 39 Insert a Memory Card e ssecsssssscssseccssessccssecsssseesssseecesueecssneecesneeees 42 Adjust Viewfinder FOCUS sssssscsssssscsssessssssecsssesescssecsssseesssneeesees 47 Basic Photography and Playback ssssssssccssssccssssecssseecesnseersees 48 Image Recording Options 59 Mage ANCA ssscssisnsscdiassescsescudiasaccosezsczensssitessssisessussenscitezescsntasnavebedstacsentnes 60 Image Qualy sodu
163. esseesseessesssess 256 Direct USB Connection essssssesesssuseossossuooecesunsorossuusooosousooosssssse 258 Wireless and Ethernet Networks uu ssssssssssccsssssseeesssseceeennees 261 Printing PHOtograpls ssssssccsssccssseecssssecessseecssseecssseesesseeesnseees Direct USB CONNECTION eessessssssecsssstesesseesssstecsssesssssseesssnsessss Viewing Photographs ON TV ssssescsssescsseesessseeeesssecesseessnsneeessees Standard Definition Devices High Definition Devices sssscsssssccsseecssseescsneecsssseccsseessseteesee xiii Menu Guide 277 The Playback Menu Managing IMages ssssscssssccseeeeeees 278 Del E e E N 281 Playback Folder 281 Hide Image 281 Display Mode 282 Copy IMAGE S setsesssessscctvontsscssscesassanstsusscnsssssdestasesassstusdanessteasenes 283 Image Review essessssccsssrsecsesesssesessssensssasssscessssnessseessecssseseeses 287 After Delet sniisssssssesinsisssssrssscerissessinisossresisseassvirsstasiiseas 287 Rotate Tall Slide Show Print Set DPOF sssscssessassscessasecosesnasseanctsnseonstsasseacesnsesececosasacecnnss 289 i The Shooting Menu Shooting Options cscsssescsecesees 290 Shooting Menu Bank Reset Shooting Menu M Active FOLDED sccsscseisssssessoceasscecsusssacasncisanscosstecasennsvas esssuudeoonsoeaies Image Quality on eeecsseecssstscccssececsseccesueecssneccsnseessnsesesnseesssueeses Image Size Image Area Manage Pictu
164. ettings 109 ISO sensitivity 107 ISO sensitivity step value 313 i TTL 190 196 J JPEG 65 67 71 JPEG compression 67 Optimal quality 67 Size priority 67 L L 69 LAN 383 Language 347 LCD 10 324 345 399 400 LCD brightness 345 LCD illumination 324 Lens 37 84 378 attaching 37 cap 37 38 cap rear 37 compatible 378 CPU 38 380 distance information 196 focus ring 38 mounting index 37 38 non CPU 220 381 data 221 removing 38 type D 380 type G 380 Live view 90 Live view mode 91 Hand held 91 94 Tripod 91 97 Release mode 92 Live view 90 102 LO 109 Lock mirror up for cleaning 345 Long exp NR 299 M M 74 83 M manual focus mode 83 M medium 69 Magenta 148 367 Manage Picture Control 174 Manual 83 95 124 Mass Storage 257 350 Matrix 114 316 332 Max continuous release 320 Memory buffer 88 89 Memory card 42 345 389 capacity of 423 formatting 45 345 slot 42 160 230 Metering 114 316 332 center weighted 114 matrix 114 selector 53 115 spot 114 Microdrive 6 42 389 Mirror 86 90 105 lock up for cleaning 395 Modeling flash 326 Monitor 14 57 90 101 231 318 390 Monitor off delay 318 Monochrome 366 Black and white 366 Cyanotype 366 Sepia 366 Mounting index 37 38 MTP PTP 257 350 441 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Multi selector
165. everse rotation pg 339 No f7 Change main sub pg 339 Off Aperture setting pg 340 Sub command dial Menus and playback pg 340 Off f8 Release button to use dial pg 341 No f9 No memory card pg 342 Enable release f10 Reverse indicators pg 343 Hehe 422 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 2 GB SanDisk Extreme IV SDCFX4 card at different image quality image size and image area settings EE FX format 36 x 24 Image Area Image quality Image size Filesize No of images Buffer capacity NEF RAW Lossless 13 3 MB 100 18 compressed 12 bit NEF RAW Lossless compressed 14 bit 163MB a 16 NEF RAW _ Compressed 12 bit Pe 138 20 NEF RAW _ Compressed 14 bit 138MB in 16 NEF RAW Uncompressed 18 8 MB 100 17 12 bit NEF RAW Uncompressed a 24 7 MB 77 16 14 bit L 35 9 MB 53 17 TIFF RGB M 20 7 MB 95 19 S 10 0 MB 211 25 L 5 7 MB 279 52 JPEG fine 3 M 3 2MB 496 92 S 1 4 MB 1000 96 L 2 9 MB 548 74 JPEG normal M 1 6 MB 976 98 S 0 7 MB 2000 100 L 1 4 MB 1000 79 JPEG basic M 0 8 MB 1800 100 S 0 4 MB 3900 100 423 EE DX Format 24 x 16 Image Area Image quality Image size Filesize No of images Buffer capacity NEF RAW Lossless A
166. fault eerLleee D P 21 points peer eres paj ae eal SHS i area AF 51 points FERIM AA 51 points 3D tracking Auto area AF Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Manual Focus Single point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used See Also For information on the settings available in dynamic area AF see Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area pg 306 For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera see Custom Setting a4 Focus tracking with lock on pg 308 77 78 Focus Point Selection The camera offers a choice of 51 focus points that together cover a wide area of the frame The focus point can be selected manually allowing photographs to be composed the main subject AF area mode selector amp Nikon D5 Taro positioned almost anywhere in the frame single point and dynamic area AF or automatically auto area AF note that manual focus point detection is not available when auto area AF is selected To select the focus point manually 1 Rotate the focus selector lock to This allows the multi selector to be used to select the focus point Se Focus selector lock 2 Select the focus point Use the mu
167. flash aa units Advanced Area metered by flash exposure fo nate A master Wireless Lighting flash meter s See Also For information on using the depth of field preview or AE L AF L button for FV lock see Custom Setting f5 Assign preview button pg 337 or Custom Setting f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 338 203 Flash Contacts The camera is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching optional flash units directly to the camera and a sync terminal that allows flash units to be connected via a sync cable When an optional flash unit is attached the flash will fire whenever the shutter is released HE The Accessory Shoe Use the accessory shoe to mount optional flash units directly on the camera without a sync cable pg 191 The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a locking pin such as the SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 BE The Sync Terminal A sync cable can be connected to the sync terminal as required Do not connect another flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe 204 Other Shooting Options This chapter covers restoring default settings making multiple exposures interval timer photography and using GPS units and non CPU lenses Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings pg 206 Multiplelexposutemuescccccscceecctcnerctteerretretccet
168. fully charged battery 48 Choose longer delays for Custom Displays turn off without Setting c2 Auto meter off delay 317 318 warning or c4 Monitor off delay Unusual characters See A Note on Electronically 402 appear in control panels Controlled Cameras below Control panel or The response times and brightness viewfinder displays are of these displays varies with unresponsive and dim temperature A Note on Electronically Controlled Cameras In extremely rare instances unusual characters may appear in the monitor or control panels and the camera may stop functioning In most cases this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge Turn the camera off remove and replace the battery and turn the camera on again or if you are using an AC adapter available separately disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again In the event of continued malfunction contact your retailer or Nikon authorized service representative Note that disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred Data already recorded to the card will not be affected BE Shooting Problem Solution Page Camera takes time to turn on Delete files or folders Shutter release disabled e Memory card is full or not inserted e CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not l
169. g on the number of the images in the buffer recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card See Also For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst see Custom Setting d3 Max continuous release pg 320 For information on the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst see page 423 89 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View Select live view mode to frame pictures in the monitor Rotate the release mode dial to amp Choose live view options in shooting menu pg 91 Hand held pg 94 amp Tripod pg 97 Raisemirrorand Fass Frame a picture in the display view RE viewfinder and focus through lens in monitor Raise mirror and display view through lens in Focus Mirror clicks down and monitor turns off Focus Press button to zoom in and check focus Check view in monitor Monitor turns on when shutter release button is pressed
170. g one of the command dials see note below The setting On Auto selected using the command dial is reset when the reset camera or exposure meters turn off exposure compensation settings selected using the 4 button are not reset RESET As above except that the exposure compensation On value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off Off Exposure compensation is set by pressing the default button and rotating the main command dial Change Main Sub The dial used to set exposure compensation when On Auto reset or On is selected for Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Change main sub pg 339 Customize command dials gt Change main sub Off default On mP Sub command dial Sub command dial 2 3 5 Sub command dial Main command dial 2 2A Main command dial Sub command dial SiM N A 314 b5 Center Weighted Area When calculating exposure center Option weighted metering assigns the greatest 8 bp 8mm weight to a circle in the center of the frame 12 b 12 mm default The diameter of this circle can be setto 915 615mm 8 12 15 or 20 mm or to the average of the 20 p 20 mm entire frame OAvg Average Note that unless Average is selected the diameter is fixed at 12 mm when a non CPU lens is us
171. ge playback display see Step 4 on page 264 2 Aes fi 100NC_D3 DSC_0001 JPG 15 12 2007 10 16 00 4256x2832 268 2 Choose Print select or a PictBridge Print DPOF Highlight one of the following Print DPOF J options and press gt p Index print e Print select Select pictures for printing e Print DPOF Print an existing print order created with the Print set DPOF option in the playback menu pg 272 The current print order will be displayed in Step 3 To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print See page 271 for more information 3 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture full screen press MQ button To select the Om button current picture for printing press the O n button and press A The picture will be marked Fina Kom RA with a G icon and the number ma of prints will be set to 1 Se Keeping the O n button pressed press A or W to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected Nikon DZ 4 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options Start printing W Page size 3 5x5in Border Time stamp 269 5 Adjust printing options ri Setu
172. graph card pg 158 152 The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d 0 through d 4 A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset pg 163 d 0 Stores last value measured for white By White balance balance pg 154 This preset is overwritten when a new value is measured d 1 d 4 Store values copied from d 0 pg 158 PRE Select W Set Store values copied from images on memory card pg 159 Y 100 3 100 al i Ka 100 4 100 5 100 6 PRE Set GQZoom elect Set White Balance Presets Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks pg 291 A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank no warning is displayed for preset d 0 153 BE Measuring a Value for White Balance 154 1 Light a reference object Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph In studio settings a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance in exposure mode M adjust exposure so that the electronic analog exposure displays shows 0 pg 126 2 Set white balance to PRE Preset manual Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until PRE is displayed in the rear control panel of
173. graphy Other Shooting Options E More About Playback Voice Memos Connections Menu Guide Technical Notes Q amp A Index Find what you re looking for using this question and answer index Hl New Features Question Key phrase See page How do take pictures in 35mm format Image area 60 How do take high quality NEF RAW 14 bit NEF RAW 68 photos How do record photographs using two Slot 2 7 memory cards Can I use the monitor as a viewfinder Live view 90 Can I control how photos are processed Picture Controls 166 How do I preserve details in shadows and ere highlights Active D Lighting 185 How do focus on erratically moving 3D tracking 307 subjects Can adjust focus separately for different AF fine tune 358 lenses HE Camera Setup Question Key phrase See page How do focus the viewfinder Viewfinder focus 47 a do I keep the monitor from turning Monitor off delay 318 How do I keep the shutter speed and ito met rotf 50 317 aperture displays from turning off Question Key phrase See page How do set the clock How do set the clock for daylight savings time World time 40 347 How do I change time zones when travel How do adjust monitor brightness for LCD brightness 345 menus or playback How do restore default settings Two button reset 206 How do restore shooting menu
174. gt Type item in the shooting menu offers the following compression options for NEF RAW images Option Description Lossless NEF images are compressed using a reversible ONE compressed algorithm reducing file size by about 20 40 default percent with no effect on image quality ON Compressed gt NEF images are compressed using a non reversible algorithm reducing file size by about 40 55 percent with almost no effect on image quality Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed Recording time increases slightly EE The NEF RAW Recording Menu NEF RAW Bit Depth The NEF RAW recording gt NEF RAW bit depth item in the shooting menu offers the following bit depth options for NEF RAW images Option Description 12 bit 12 bit default NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits 14bit 14 bit producing files larger than 12 bit files but increasing the color data recorded 68 Image Size Image size is measured in pixels Choose from Large the default option Medium or Small note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image area pg 60 Image area Option Size pixels Print size cm in L 4 256 x 2 832 54 1 x 36 0 21 3 x 14 2 joan M 3 184 x 2 120 40 4 x 26 9 15 9 x 20 6 S 2 128x 1 416 27 0 x 18 0 10 6x7 1 L 2 784x 1 848
175. h selected for Image 1 Overlays saved in NEF RAW format use the compression selected for Type in the NEF RAW recording menu and have the same bit depth as the original images JPEG overlays are saved using size priority compression 370 Side by Side Comparison Compare retouched copies to the original photographs 1 Select Side by side RETOUCH MENU S e D Lighting comparison a Redeye correction Trim PE l 7 Highlight Side by side Fiter effects comparison and press gt to _ display a picture selection g Lal Sidebyside comparison ak dialog 2 Select a picture F Side by side comparison aa highlight a picture and press se pa ia Y L Only retouched copies eA shown by a gh icon or EDZoom___ GOK photographs that have been retouched can be selected To view the highlighted photograph full frame press and hold the S button Use the multi selector to 371 372 3 Compare the copy with the Options used to original created copy The source image is displayed on the left the retouched copy on the right with the options used to create the copy listed nsc ood at the top of the display Press the multi selector in the Source Retouched direction indicated by the image copy arrow adjacent to the highlighted image A V lt or P to switch between the source image and the retouched copy To view the highlighted picture full frame press and hold the Q button If the copy
176. h the battery or charger during charging Remove the battery unplug the charger and take the battery and charger to a Nikon authorized service representative for inspection Charging and Calibrating Two Batteries The MH 22 charges only one battery at a time If batteries are inserted in both chambers they will be charged in the order inserted If the calibration button for the first battery is pressed the second battery can not be calibrated or charged until calibration and charging of the first battery are complete MH 22 quick charger Rated input AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Rated output DC 12 6 V 1 200 mA Supported batteries Nikon EN EL4a EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries Charging time per Approx 2 hours and 25 minutes EN EL4a or 1 hour battery and 40 minutes EN EL4 when battery is fully discharged Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions W x H x D Approx 160 x 85 x 50 5 mm 6 3 x 3 3 x 2 0 in Length of cord Approx 1800 mm 5 ft 11 in Weight Approx 260 g 9 1 oz excluding power cable EN EL4a rechargeable Li ion battery Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated capacity 11 1 V 2 500 mAh Dimensions W x H x D Approx 56 5 x 27 x 82 5 mm 2 2 x 1 1 x 3 2 in Weight Approx 180 g 6 3 oz excluding terminal cover 435 436 Supported Standards e DCF Version 2 0 The Design Rule for Camera File
177. he actual shutter speed is faster than 1 250 s 1 250 s default Flash sync speed set to 1 250 s 1 250 s Auto FP 1 200 s Flash sync speed set to 200 s 1 160 s Flash sync speed set to 160 s 1 125s Flash sync speed set to 1 125 s 1 100 s Flash sync speed set to 100 s 1 80 s Flash sync speed set to 1 80 s 1 60 s Flash sync speed set to eo s Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter priority auto or manual exposure modes select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed 30 s or bulb An X flash sync indicator will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel 325 326 e2 Flash Shutter Speed This option determines the slowest shutter speed available when using front or rear curtain sync or red eye reduction in programmed auto or aperture priority auto exposure modes regardless of the setting chosen shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in shutter priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash settings of slow sync slow rear curtain sync or red eye reduction with slow sync Options range from 1 60 s 1 60 s the default setting to 30 s 30 s e3 Modeling Flash If On the default setting is selected when the camera is being used with an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS pg 190 the flash unit mounted on the camera and any CLS
178. he battery upside down or backwards Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat e Do not immerse in or expose to water e Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged To avoid damage to the product be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains e When the battery is not in use attach the terminal cover and store in a cool dry place e The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool e Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery such as discoloration or deformation xix Z Observe proper precautions when handling the quick charger e Keep dry Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock e Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth Continued use could result in fire e Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock e Do not damage modify or forcibly tug or bend the power cable Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame Should the insulation be damaged and the wires
179. he file name is changed GPS Adjust settings for connection to a GPS unit pg 223 Virtual Horizon Display a virtual horizon based on 5 Virtual horizon information from the camera orientation sensor vV Tilting the Camera The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back See Also For information on using the electronic analog exposure displays as a tilt meter see Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button gt FUNC button press pg 331 Non CPU Lens Data By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture for up to nine non CPU lenses the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions pg 220 357 AF Fine Tune Fine tune focus for up to 20 lenses AF tuning is not recommended in most situations use only when required Option Description Pe e 0n Turn AF tuning on On Off e Off default Turn AF tuning off Tune AF for the current lens CPU Move focal lenses only Press A or W to point away Current Saved choose a value between 20 and from camera value value 20 Values for up to 20 lenses can MFT co ine tune be stored t Saved value lt 85mm F1 4 ul No Choose the AF tuning value used E Default when no previously saved value ae exists for the current lens CPU Move focal Previous lenses only A point toward value camera 358 Option Description List previously saved AF tun
180. hite Balance cscssscsssssessssceeees pg 147 Choosing a Color Temperature sccccssccecssscseees pg 151 Preset Manuali ea rA AE teiereectertss pg 152 143 144 White Balance Options For natural coloration choose a white balance setting that matches the light source before shooting The following options are available Color temp Option K Description White balance is adjusted automatically using color temperature measured by image AUTO Auto 3 500 sensor and 1 005 segment RGB default 8 000 sensor For best results use type G or D lens If optional flash unit is used white balance reflects conditions in effect when the flash goes off z Incandescent 3 000 Use under incandescent lighting xk Fluorescent Use under following seven light sources Sodium vapor lamps 2 700 Use under sodium vapor lighting found in sports venues Warm white Use under warm white fluorescent 3 000 3 fluorescent lights White fluorescent 3 700 Use under white fluorescent lights Use under cool white fluorescent Cool white fluorescent 4 200 lights Day white fluorescent 5 000 a daylight white fluorescent Daylight fluorescent 6 500 Use under daylight fluorescent lights R Use under high color temperature High temp mercury EO 7 200 light sources e g mercury vapor vapor lamps 3 Direct sunlight 5 200 Use with subjects lit by direct su
181. hlight the desired preset _ FS and press the center of the e ha multi selector To select the a highlighted preset and display EL PRE Select OSet fine tuning menu pg 147 without completing the next step press instead of pressing the center of the multi selector Select Set E White balance Preset manual Highlight Set and press gt Fine tuning menu for the Edit comment selected white balance preset S Selectimaoe Copy d 0 is displayed pg 147 161 162 Selecting a White Balance Preset the WB Button At a setting of PRE Preset manual presets can also be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The current preset is displayed in the rear control panel while the WB button is pressed A WB button Sub command dial Rear control panel EH Entering a Comment Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty six characters for a selected white balance preset 1 Select PRE Preset gt White balance a Incandescent manual Y Highlight Preset manual in H a cloudy Ic the white balance menu S EANA pg 144 and press ee kl 2 Selecta preset fy White balance Highlight the desired preset te 5 and press the center of the z MRA multi selector PRE Select OSet 3 Select Edit comment E White balance Preset manual Highlight Edit comment and E press P icc amp Sel
182. hting 363 Red eye correction 364 X Trim 365 Monochrome 366 Q Filter effects 367 goY Color balance 367 sh Image overlay 368 mo Side by side comparison 371 Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set Picture Control pg 168 Creating Retouched Copies 1 Select an item in the retouch menu Press A or to highlight an item gt to select Depending on the option selected a menu may be displayed highlight an option and press gt a Y gt A 17 lt QOP 2 D z o RETOUCH MENU e D Lighting Eh a Redeye correction K Trim x m Filter effects FE Color balance CIA Image overlay Side by side comparison o 2 Selecta picture The pictures on the memory card will be displayed Use the multi selector to highlight a picture to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the R button If two memory cards are inserted the slot can be selected by holding the HQ button and pressing A The menu shown at right will be displayed pg 230 highlight the desired slot and press 68 gt Black and white oh FE KoM EA Ea E E WOK Choose slot a Cancel 3 Display retouch options Press to display retouch options see the section for the selected option for details To exit without creating a retouched copy press MENU Black and white ENDCancel Save 361 362 4 Create a retouched c
183. http www nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQs and general advice on digital imaging and photography Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area See the following URL for contact information http nikonimaging com XxiV Introduction This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera including the names of camera parts OVENVIGW E E E E T pg 2 Getting to Know the Camera ssssssssssscsssssececsesesees pg 3 Gamera BOA aaen A tire AA Aa tar eceaere TheslopiGontroliPanel ers e a eerie The Rear Control Panel The Viewfinder Display The Shooting Information Display ssssesccssesecrseescrseeseessecs pg 14 The GommandDialsweenencetene A ee A EA pg 16 Q ick Start GUId E aa ae aeee e AA A AREA pg 23 Overview Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single lens reflex SLR digital camera Please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly to get the most from the camera and keep them where they will be read by all those who use the product M Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements THE USE OF NON NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON
184. icons appear in the viewfinder and the top control panel button Sub command dial To unlock aperture press the I button and rotate the sub command dial until the icons disappear from the displays EmA A mi fy 128 Autoexposure AE Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure 1 Select center weighted or Metering selector spot metering pg 114 lock button Matrix metering will not produce the desired results with autoexposure lock If using center weighted metering select the center focus point with the multi selector pg 78 2 Lock exposure Shutter release button Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway With the shutter release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point press the AE L AF L button to lock exposure and focus except in manual focus mode Confirm that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder AE L AF L button While exposure lock is in effect an AE L KONNE indicator will appear in the viewfinder c c AXO e P 125 Sh 200 33 129 130 3 Recompose the photograph Keeping the AE L AF L button pressed recompose the photograph and shoot Metered Area In spot metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 4 mm 0 16 in
185. ideo device Note that resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device Television Playback Use of an EH 6 AC adapter available separately is recommended for extended playback When the EH 6 is connected the camera monitor off delay will be fixed at ten minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically Note that the edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen Audio Output pg 254 Set HDMI audio video output to play back or record voice memos on the video device Slide Shows The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for automated playback pg 288 275 276 High Definition Devices The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type A HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable 2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown Connect to camera A i Connect to high definition device 3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel Turn the camera on and press P gt button During playback images will be displayed on the high definition television or monitor screen the camera monitor will remain off HDMI pg 346 At the default setting of Auto the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI format for the high definition device The HDMI format
186. iewfinder display and AF area brackets are in sharp focus 3 Replace the diopter adjustment knob Push the diopter adjustment knob back in Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses Corrective lenses available separately pg 385 can be used to further adjust viewfinder diopter Before attaching a diopter adjustment viewfinder lens remove the DK 17 viewfinder eyepiece by closing the viewfinder shutter to release the eyepiece lock D and then unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right 47 48 Basic Photography and Playback Turn the Camera On Before taking photographs turn the camera on and check the battery level and number of exposures remaining as described below 1 Turn the camera on Turn the camera on The control panels will turn on and the display in the viewfinder will light Power switch 7 m Q 2 Check the battery level Check the battery level in the SA viewfinder or top control panel sron Icon Control panel Viewfinder Description Battery fully charged Cm Battery partially discharged al G pes Low battery Prepare to charge battery or ready spare battery Ca cA Shutter release disabled Charge or blinks blinks exchange battery No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional AC adapter 3 Check the number of expo
187. if i i E 00 0100 interval timer photography Sse eNA was paused during shooting BA OMove OSet_ 13 38 any shots remaining in the current interval will be canceled 217 218 HE Interrupting Interval Timer Photography Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted Interval timer photography can also be ended by e Selecting Start gt Off in the interval timer menu e Performing a two button reset pg 206 e Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu pg 293 e Changing bracketing settings pg 134 Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends BE No Photograph Photographs will not be taken if the previous photograph is yet to be taken the memory buffer or memory card is full or the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF note that the camera focuses again before each shot Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval In Cx continuous high speed mode photographs will be taken at a rate of nine shots per second or if DX format 24 x 16 is selected for Image area at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d2 Shooting speed pg 320 gt Continuous high speed In single frame and C continuous low speed photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d2 Shooting speed pg 320 gt Continuous low speed Using the Monitor Pic
188. ine tuning off If the current Picture Control has been modified existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored See Also See page 418 for a list of default settings 207 208 Multiple Exposure Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures in a single photograph Multiple exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting and produce results with colors noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor BE Creating a Multiple Exposure Note that at default settings shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s 1 Select Multiple exposure a SHOOTINGMENY Color space SRGB Highlight Multiple exposure z ple OF High ISO NR OFF In the shooting menu pg 290 A e ISO sensitivity settings Live view a and press P Mitte epose Taal El Interval timer shooting OFF 2 Select Number of shots ri Le Highlight Number of shots E and press gt A B Number of shots 2 P qe Auto gain ON Extended Recording Times For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s select On for the Image review pg 287 option in the playback menu and extend the monitor off delay using Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 318 The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selecte
189. information display 282 Copy Image s Copy photographs from the memory card in slot 1 to the memory card in slot 2 Option Description Select image s Select photographs from memory card in slot 1 aca a Select destination folder on memory card in slot 2 Copy images Copy selected photographs to specified destination 1 Choose Select image s as Cony image s Highlight Select image s and recs Y 2 Choose the source folder me Coy imaseb J g iSelect image s Highlight the folder containing the images to be copied and A aa press gt z 283 3 Preselect all or protected me conyimagels J Default image selection images eT 5 Highlight one of the following N EEEE Select protected images options and press gt e Deselect all No images will be preselected Choose this option when selecting individual images by hand e Select all images Preselect all images in the current folder Choose this option when selecting all or most images in the current folder to be copied e Select protected images Preselect all protected images in the current folder 4 select images ia Deselect all Images preselected in Step 3 E T E are marked by a v icon To pa S malai select additional images or s Ecs deselect preselected pictures Oset EDZ00m OOK highlight the image and press the center of the multi selector Press to return to the Copy image s menu when s
190. ing values If a value exists for the current lens it will be shown with a icon To delete a lens from the list highlight the desired lens and press To change a lens identifier for example to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to List distinguish it from other lenses of the same type highlight the saved desired lens and press P values The menu shown at right will be i AF fine tune displayed press A or W to choose an Skada number identifier and press to save changes yam and exit a M AF Tuning The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is applied M Live View Tripod Mode Tuning is not applied to contrast detect autofocus when Tripod is selected in live view mode pg 97 Saved Value Only one value can be stored per lens If a teleconverter is used separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter Firmware Version View the current camera firmware version 359 360 K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of the photographs on the memory card The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera For information on using the shooting menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 26 Option See page Eh D Lig
191. ingle point AF 76 77 t Dynamic area AF 76 77 Auto area AF 76 77 S 86 CL 86 88 320 Cu 86 88 320 90 Self timer 103 Mup 105 J Matrix 114 316 Center weighted 114 315 316 J Spot 114 316 P Programmed auto 118 5 Shutter priority auto 120 A Aperture priority auto 122 M Manual 124 Help 31 r Memory buffer 55 89 423 PRE Preset manual 145 152 Numerics 1 005 segment RGB sensor 144 196 3D color matrix metering ll 114 3D tracking 307 A AN 4 274 cable i 274 AC adapter 383 Accessories 383 Active D Lighting 185 Active folder 293 AE L 81 129 338 AF 74 304 AF activation 308 AF assist 195 AF fine tune 358 AF point selection 310 AF area brackets 47 95 AF area mode 76 auto area AF 76 77 dynamic area AF 76 77 307 single point AF 76 77 AF C priority selection 304 AF ON button 311 AF ON button 75 97 311 AF ON button for vertical shooting 75 312 AF S priority selection 305 After delete 287 A M switch 37 Amber 148 367 Aperture 38 116 122 128 lock 128 maximum 84 220 minimum 116 426 Aperture priority auto 122 Assign AE L AF L button 338 Assign FUNC button 331 Assign preview button 337 Audio 254 288 289 350 Audio output 254 350 Auto bracketing 134 327 328 Auto bracketing Mode M 328 Auto bracketing set 327 AE amp flash
192. ion wraps around from one edge of the viewfinder to another Option Description tocus point selection wraps H Aan around from top to bottom bottom to top right to left and left s 10 to right so that for example SS aa Wrap k pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display The focus area display is bounded by the outermost focus No wrap i default points so that for example pressing when a focus point at uU Ithe right edge of the display is selected has no effect a8 AF Point Selection Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus point selection Option Description Choose from the 51 focus points shown at right AF51 51 points 3 EEEE default 20000000000 eeeooones j shown at right Use for quick i lo a a AF11 11 points focus point selection eae E Be Ly Choose from the 11 focus points a9 AF ON Button Choose the function performed when the AF 0N button is pressed om Option Description AF ON PEEN AF ON default Pressing the AF ON button initiates autofocus i AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the AF ON button is pressed fia AE lock only Exposure locks while the AF ON button is pressed Exposure locks when the AF ON butt
193. isplay or highlight the photograph Only one voice memo can be recorded per image additional voice memos can not be recorded for images already marked with a J icon 2 Press and hold the button A voice memo will be recorded while the amp button is held down note that no voice memo will be recorded if the amp button is not held down for at least one second During Recording During recording the amp icons in the rear NORD a w control panel will blink A countdown timer in Gaja A iej the rear control panel shows the length of the voice memo that can be recorded in seconds In playback mode a icon is displayed in the monitor during recording Interrupting Recording Recording will end automatically if e The MENU button is pressed to display the menus e The E button is pressed e The shutter release button is pressed halfway e The camera is turned off During interval timer photography recording will end automatically about two seconds before the next photograph is taken After Recording If a voice memo has been recorded for the most recent photograph a icon will be displayed in the rear control panel Rear control panel If a voice memo exists for the photograph currently selected in playback mode a X icon will be displayed in the monitor Voice Memo File Names Voice memos are stored as WAV files with names of the form xxxxnnnn WAV where x
194. ith maximum aperture of f 1 4 and minimum aperture of f 16 e g AF 50mm f 1 4 D Qe eaneoVearrnoor vo One t1 1 4 f 2 2 8 f 4 5 6 1 8 11 t 16 f 22 32 1 4 4 16 Aperture Ibo Bs 6 O 30 15 8 4 2 1 2 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 5001000 2000 4000 8000 Shutter speed The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent When matrix metering is used values over 17 1 3 EV are reduced to 17 1 3 EV 426 Specifications BE Nikon D3 Digital Camera Type Type Single lens reflex digital camera Lens mount Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts Effective pixels Effective pixels 12 1 million Image sensor Image sensor 36 x 23 9 mm CMOS sensor Nikon FX format Total pixels 12 87 million Dust reduction System Image Dust Off reference data optional Capture NX software required Storage Image size pixels e FX format 36 x 24 image area 4 256 x 2 832 L 3 184 x 2 120 M 2 128 x 1 416 S DX format 24 x 16 image area 2 784 x 1 848 L 2 080 x 1 384 M 1 392 x 920 S e 5 4 30 x 24 image area 3 552 x 2 832 L 2 656 x 2 120 M 1 776 x 1 416 S File format NEF RAW 12 or 14 bit lossless compressed compressed or uncompressed e TIFF RGB e JPEG JPEG Baseline complia
195. itiis eos is pressed Press A or W to scroll through am Haech the display O n button Multiple exposure Record the specified number of shots as a single image If no operations are performed for 30 s shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from any photographs that have been taken 31 First Steps Charge the Battery The D3 is powered by an EN EL4a rechargeable Li ion battery supplied The EN EL4a is not fully charged at shipment To maximize shooting time charge the battery in the supplied MH 22 quick charger before use About two hours and twenty five minutes are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains 1 Plug the charger in Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery charger and plug the power cable into an electrical outlet All lamps will remain off 2 Remove the terminal cover Remove the terminal cover from the battery 3 Remove the contact protector Remove the contact protector of the quick charger s battery chambers 32 4 Charge the battery Chamber Contacts CHARGE SHENG CALIBRATION w Insert the battery terminals first aligning the end of the battery with the guide and then sliding the battery in the direction indicated until it clicks into place The chamber lamp and charge lamps will blink while the battery charges Chamber Charge l
196. ity step value pg 313 Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value ISO sensitivity settings available LO 1 LO 0 7 LO 0 3 200 250 320 400 500 1 3 step 640 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 default 3200 4000 5000 6400 HI 0 3 HI 0 7 HI 1 HI 2 LO 1 LO 0 5 200 280 400 560 800 1100 1600 2200 3200 4500 6400 HI 0 5 HI 1 HI 2 LO 1 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 HI 1 HI 2 If possible the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the step value is changed If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value ISO sensitivity will be rounded up to the nearest available setting HI 0 3 HI 2 The settings HI 0 3 through HI 2 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 2 EV over ISO 6400 ISO 8000 25600 equivalent Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion LO 0 3 LO 1 The settings LO 0 3 through LO 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 1 EV below ISO 200 ISO 160 100 equivalent Use for larger apertures when lighting is bright Contrast is slightly lower than normal in most cases ISO sensitivities of ISO 200 or above are recommended See Also For information on Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 313 For information using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities see page 299 1 2 step 1 step 109 110 Auto ISO
197. justment lens 385 Display mode 282 D Lighting 363 DPOF 262 Dust off ref photo 351 Dynamic AF area 306 51 points 3D tracking 307 Dynamic area AF 76 77 307 E Easy exposure compensation 314 Electronic analog exposure display 124 126 132 Ethernet 261 383 EV steps for exposure cntrl 313 EV steps for exposure comp 313 Exif version 2 21 436 Exposure 113 116 129 132 134 bracketing 134 lock 129 meters 50 317 mode 116 aperture priority auto 122 manual 124 programmed auto 118 shutter priority auto 120 Exposure bracketing 134 Exposure compensation 132 Exposure delay mode 324 439 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Exposure preview 99 101 single servo AF 74 305 F point 51 78 310 contrast detect 91 98 99 100 tracking 75 77 308 3D 76 77 307 predictive 75 Focus point illumination 309 Focus point wrap around 310 Focus tracking with lock on 308 Focusing screen 384 type B clear matte VI 384 type E clear matte VI 384 File information 232 File naming 296 File number sequence 321 Filter effects 367 Skylight 367 Warm filter 367 Fine tune optimal exposure 315 Firmware version 359 Flash 134 189 197 326 327 bracketing 134 327 control 196 Format 45 345 i TTL balanced fill flash for digital Format memory card 345 SLR 196 Front curtain sync 197 standard i TTL flash for digi
198. ke a single Image overlay 368 image BE Viewing or Printing Photographs on Other Devices Question Key phrase See page Can view my photos on TV Television playback 274 Can view my photos in High Definition HDMI 276 Connecting toa 2 How do copy photos to my computer computer 256 How do I print photographs Printing photographs 262 Can print photos without a computer Printing via USB 263 Can print the date on my photographs Time stamp 266 270 How do I order professional prints Print set DPOF 272 EE Optional Accessories Question Key phrase See page What optional flash units Speedlights Optional flash units 191 can use What lenses can I use Compatible lenses 378 What AC adapters remote cords and viewfinder accessories are available for Other accessories 383 my camera What memory cards can use Approved memory 389 cards What software is available for my Other accessories 387 camera Table of Contents OBA INDEX insni airsan iaiia saiia iv FOR YOUN Saey oonan xviii Notices i Introduction 1 OVENI OW siscsscdsdsscebscsscsuies seusesuctessacesacdastsdtaacsacdeaba stesdsa dstanesaasagcisbenecunasaces 2 Getting to Know the CaMesra csscssssssccssessccsesecseseecsnscsceseeseeseeesnees 3 Camera BOY eecsssssccsssssssscsssecsssseccsnscessneessusecssnsesesnseeseeneesssneeeesaee 3 The Top Control Panel sessssssssssecssssesc
199. l End slide show and exit to full frame pg 228 mode or thumbnail playback pg 241 Exit to shooting Press shutter release button halfway to return mode Hy to shooting mode A dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or when the button is pressed to pause playback Select Restart to restart if the slide was paused the show o will resume from the next slide or Exit to py return to the playback menu BE Audio Playback Choose On to play voice memos during slide shows The following options will be displayed Option Description Playback ends when next frame is displayed even if entire memo has not been played Next frame is not displayed until entire memo has been played even if frame interval is shorter than voice memo Frame interval Length of voice memo Choose Off the default option to disable voice memo playback during slide shows Print Set DPOF Choose Select set to select pictures for printing on a DPOF compatible device pg 272 Choose Deselect all to remove all pictures from the current print order 289 O The Shooting Menu Shooting Options The shooting menu contains the options listed below For information on using the shooting menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 26 Shooting menu bank 291 Reset shooting menu 293 Active folder 293 File naming 296 Slo
200. l be stored BE New Folder Number 1 Select New folder fa Active folder E New folder number number ilo Highlight New folder number and press P j e Move Set ONOK 293 294 2 Choose a folder number Press the lt or gt to highlight a digit press A or W to change If a folder with the selected number already exists a D or icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number e L Folder is empty e Folder is partially full e Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 No further pictures can be stored in this folder Save changes and exit Press to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button If a folder with the specified number does not already exist a new folder will be created Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full HE Select Folder 1 Choose Select folder Highlight Select folder and press gt 2 Highlight a folder vere 1 Select folder Press A or W to highlight a Y 102NC_03 folder Ao 10anc_pa 3 Select the highlighted folder Press to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder M Folder and File Numbers If the current folder is numbered 999 and co
201. l functions supported e Type G or D AF Nikkor All functions supported PC Micro Nikkor does not support some functions IX Nikkor lenses not supported e Other AF Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering Il Lenses for F3AF not supported e Al P Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II e Non CPU Can be used in exposure modes fi and M electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum aperture is f 5 6 or faster color matrix metering and aperture value display supported if user provides lens data Al lenses only Shutter Type Electronically controlled vertical travel focal plane shutter Speed 1 3000 30 s in steps of 1 3 2 or 1 EV bulb X250 Flash sync speed X 1 250 s synchronizes with shutter at 250 s or slower Release Release mode S single frame CL continuous low speed CH continuous high speed live view self timer Mup mirror up Frame advance rate DX format 24 x 16 Up to 9 fps CL or 9 11 fps CH e Other image areas Up to 9 fps Self timer Can be selected from 2 5 10 and 20 s duration Exposure Metering TTL exposure metering using 1 005 segment RGB sensor Metering method e Matrix 3D color matrix metering II type G and D lenses color matrix metering II other CPU lenses color matrix metering available with non CPU lenses if user provides lens data e Center weighted Weight of 75 giv
202. l timer m SHOOTINGMENU a Color space shooting y Active D Lighting Long exp NR 4 High ISO NR Highlight Interval timer AN 150 sens stn shooting in the shooting UUED oF J menu pg 290 and press gt ae 2 Selecta starting trigger ES Interval timer shooting a Choose start time Highlight one of the start time following Choose start time a ESTEK options and press gt i EL e Now Shooting begins E Move OSet 13 36 about 3 s after settings are completed proceed to Step 4 e Start time Choose a start time see Step 3 M Before Shooting Choose single frame S continuous low speed Ct or continuous high speed CH release mode when using the interval timer Before beginning interval timer photography take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor Remember that the camera will focus before each shot no shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF Before choosing a starting time select World time in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date pg 40 Use of a tripod is recommended Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins To ensure that shooting is not interrupted be sure the battery is fully charged 213 214 3 Choose a start time Press lt or gt to highlight hours or minutes press A or to change The starting time is not displayed if Now is selected for
203. landscape shots User controls both shutter speed and aperture Manual ON F M pg 124 Set shutter speed to tus tb for long time p9 exposures Lens Types When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture highest f number Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode A aperture priority auto and M manual In other modes exposure mode A is automatically selected when a non CPU lens is attached The exposure mode indicator F or S in the top control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder To choose the exposure mode press the MODE MODE button button and rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the en viewfinder or top control panel K C A D RA Main command dial Depth of Field Preview To preview the effects of aperture press and hold Preview button the depth of field preview button The lens will be stopped down to the aperture value selected by the camera modes F and 5 or the value chosen by the user modes f and M allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder Custom Setting e3 Modeling Flash This setting controls whether the SB 800 SB 600 SB R200 and other optional flash units that support the Creative Lighting System CLS see page 190 will emit a modeling flash when th
204. layback e Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards Do not remove memory cards from the camera turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded deleted or copied to a computer Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card e Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects e Do not bend drop or subject to strong physical shocks e Do not apply force to the card casing Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card e Do not expose to water high levels of humidity or direct sunlight EE Formatting Memory Cards Memory cards must be formatted before first use Format the card as described below vV Formatting Memory Cards Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding pg 256 1 Turn the camera on Power switch 2 Press the a buttons t button MODE button Hold the MODE and i buttons down simultaneously for approximately two seconds A blinking F a r will appear in the cee a shutter speed displays in the Far er ASN viewfinder and top control panel If Nal 2 ay two memory cards are inserted the ARa ta up main command dial can be used to Vie A select the card to be format
205. lete highlighted photo 0 See page 245 for more information Record play voice See page 248 for more information memo Change protect status O of highlighted photo See page 244 for more information View images on other memory card If two memory cards are inserted choose memory card from which pictures are played back pg 230 Return to shooting mode Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken immediately Display menus See page 277 for more information See Also For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi selector see Custom Setting f1 Multi selector center button pg 330 242 Taking a Closer Look Playback Zoom Press the E button and rotate the main command dial right to zoom in on the image displayed in full frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect To Use Description Zoom in or out E oar Press R button to display frame showing area currently zoomed in While Q button is pressed main command dial can be used to control size of frame rotate dial left to zoom out right to zoom 36 x 24 3 2 format images in up to 27 x large images 20 x medium images or 13 x small images Release H button to magnify selected area to fill monitor View oth
206. ll ia om 1B Each photograph is recorded O0 Backup aon A to both memory cards At image quality settings of NEF RAW JPEG the NEF RAW image is recorded to riit RAW Slot 1 jor E the memory card in slot 1 the JPEG Slot 2 273 T JPEG image to the memory card in slot 2 At other image qualities this option is the same as Backup Y Backup RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 When the above options are selected the shutter release will be disabled when either of the memory cards is full The viewfinder and top control panel show the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount of available memory Voice memos pg 250 are appended to the copy recorded to the memory card in slot 1 71 72 Focus Controlling How the Camera Focuses This section describes the options that control how your camera focuses FOCUS MOCO ircncc ccscsecccussosossesecssssesssncevacesccsrecssescenescersscseesesss pg 74 ASAT eal MOC iiccccccccccccucssecoscscvesnsscneeccescas cateseseses soereserecsenes pg 76 Focus Point Selection s c scessssssssssesesssessscaserssesseees pg 78 Focus LOCK eeen aeneae sososrenscscescscenesvucesccsreesavscscescerunceeesvess pg 80 EER E e R E A AA pg 83 73 Focus Mode Focus mode is controlled by the Focus mode selector focus mode selector on the front of the camera autofocus AF modes in which the camera focuses automatically when the shutter release button is
207. lly if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs RESET Reset Same as for On except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder If the folder is empty file numbering is reset to 0001 1 File Number Sequence If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999 the shutter release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken Choose Reset for Custom Setting d4 File number sequence and then either format the current memory card or insert anew memory card 321 322 d5 Control Panel Viewfinder Choose the information displayed in the viewfinder and rear control panel Option Description Rear control panel Choose from ISO sensitivity IS0 the default setting and Exposures remaining If Exposures remaining is selected ISO sensitivity will only be displayed while the ISO button is pressed Viewfinder display Choose from Frame count ld the default setting and Exposures remaining Note that regardless of the option selected memory buffer capacity will be shown while the shutter release button is pressed d6 Shooting Info Display At the default setting of Auto AUTO the color of the lettering in the information display pg 14 will automatically change from black to white or
208. low pass filter Lens contacts Keep the lens contacts clean Do not touch the shutter curtain The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain poke it with cleaning tools or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower These actions could scratch deform or tear the curtain The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored but this has no affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction Storage To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area If the product will not be used for an extended period remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant Do not however store the camera case in a plastic bag as this may cause the material to deteriorate Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals To prevent mold or mildew take the camera out of storage at least once a month Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away Store the battery in a cool dry place Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away 399 400 Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted Forcibly cutting power in the
209. lti selector to select the focus point At default settings the center focus point can be selected by pressing the center of the multi selector The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked L position following selection to prevent the selected focus point from changing when the multi selector is pressed P i5 55 200 33 Portrait Tall Orientation Photographs When framing shots in portrait tall orientation use the command dials to select the focus area For more information see Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 335 See Also For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated see Custom Setting a6 Focus point illumination pg 309 For information on setting focus point selection to wrap around see Custom Setting a7 Focus point wrap around pg 310 For information on choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector see Custom Setting a8 AF point selection pg 310 For information on choosing the role of the AF 0N button for vertical shooting see Custom Setting a10 Vertical AF ON button pg 312 For information on changing the role of the multi selector center button see Custom Setting f1 Multi selector center button pg 330 79 80 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in
210. m 26 in BE Approved Memory Cards The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the D3 SanDisk Lexar Media 8 GB Professional 8 GB oe rofessiona Extreme IV SDCFX4 4GB UDMA 300 x 4GB 2 GB 2 GB 8 GB 2 GB 4GB 80 x 1GB Extreme III SDCFX3 GB Platinum II 572 MB 1GB 60 x 4GB 8 GB 8 GB 4GB 4GB Ultra Il SDCFH ic a dete 133 x WA eB 1GB i 1GB 4GB 2 GB Standard SDCFB 2GB 8Oxlt Ta MB 1GB Microdrive DSCM 11000 1GB 3K4 2 2 GB 3K4 4 4GB 3K6 6 GB Other cards have not been tested For more details on the above cards please contact the manufacturer 389 390 Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period remove the battery and store the battery in a cool dry area with the terminal cover in place To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that e are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 e are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields such as televisions or radios e are exposed to temperatures above 50 C 122 F or below 10 C 14 F Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside Camera wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled body wa
211. maller than the 35mm format picture angle while the 5 4 30 x 24 picture angle is about 1 1 times smaller To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35mm format when DX format 24 x 16 is selected multiply the focal length of the lens by about 1 5 or by about 1 1 when 5 4 30 x 24 is selected for example the effective focal length of a 50mm lens in 35mm format would be 75 mm when DX format 24 x 16 is selected or 55 mm when 5 4 30 x 24 is selected Other Accessories At the time of writing the following accessories were available for the D3 Power sources e Rechargeable Li ion Battery EN EL4a EN EL4 pp 32 34 Additional EN EL4a EN EL4 batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives These batteries can be recharged and calibrated using an MH 22 or MH 21 quick charger e Quick Charger MH 22 MH 21 pp 32 433 The MH 22 MH 21 can be used to recharge and calibrate EN EL4a and EN EL4 batteries e AC Adapter EH 6 The EH 6 can be used to power the camera for extended periods Wireless LAN adapters Wireless Transmitter WT 4 Connects the camera to wireless and Ethernet networks The photographs on the camera memory card can be viewed by computers on the same network or copied to a computer for long term storage The camera can also be controlled from any computer on the network using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Note that the WT 4 requires a
212. mera memory card card Select folder Folder No images on containing images z memory card orin from Playback folder contains no 4 42 281 nadas folder s selected menu or insert gss for playback different memory card No images can be played back until another folder has All photos in Allimages are been selected or 3 current folder are Pas 281 hidden Hide image used to hidden allow at least one image to be displayed File has been 2 created or modified File does not contain image data using a computer or different make of camera or file is corrupt File can not be played back on camera Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Memory card oe Images created with Cannot select not contain images A other devices can not 361 this file that can be be retouched retouched Check printer To gt resume select Check printer Printer error Continue if 263 available tet _ Insert paper of Check paper Pabenin printer 2 correct size and select 263 not of selected size Continue Paper jam Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select 263 printer Continue F Insert paper of Out of paper Printer iso tof selected size and 263 paper select Continue 415 416 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Check ink Check ink To resume _
213. mmand dials to perform the same functions as the Fn button 21 22 The BS 2 Accessory Shoe Cover The supplied BS 2 accessory shoe cover can be used to protect the accessory shoe or to prevent light reflected from the metal parts of the shoe from appearing in photographs The BS 2 attaches to the camera accessory shoe as shown at right To remove the accessory shoe cover hold it down with your thumb and slide it off as shown at right while keeping a firm grip on the camera Quick Start Guide Follow these steps for a quick start with the D3 1 Charge the battery pg 32 2 Insert the battery pg 34 3 Attach a lens pg 37 5 Turn the camera on pg 48 For information on choosing a language and setting the time and date see page 39 See page 47 for information on adjusting viewfinder focus 23 24 6 Check camera settings pp 48 51 Battery level Exposure Image size White balance mode HP 25 FS a a Are zz ESRA f A a E E coom EHNA Frame ISO sensitivity Image quality count Number of exposures remaining Top control panel Rear control panel 7 Select single servo autofocus pg 53 Rotate the focus mode selector to S single servo autofocus Focus and shoot pp 55 56 Press the shutter release button halfw
214. mmended when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus 74 The AF 0N Buttons For the purpose of focusing the camera AF ON button pressing either of the AF ON buttons has the same effect as pressing the shutter release button halfway AF ON button for vertical shooting Predictive Focus Tracking In continuous servo AF the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter release button is pressed halfway or either of the AF ON buttons is pressed This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released See Also For information on using focus priority in continuous servo AF see Custom Setting a1 AF C priority selection pg 304 For information on using release priority in single servo AF see Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection pg 305 For information on preventing the camera from focusing when the shutter release button is pressed halfway see Custom Setting a5 AF activation pg 308 75 76 AF Area Mode AF area mode determines how the AF area mode selector focus point is selected in autofocus mode pg 74 To select the AF area mode rotate the AF area mode selector The following options are available Bi jal Mode Description a User selects focus point manually camera focu
215. n The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor The subject will no i longer be visible in the viewfinder To exit without taking a picture rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press MENU 97 5 Check the view in the monitor To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 x and check focus press the M9 button while rotating the main command dial si e P bA E E button Main command dial While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor Autofocus focus mode S or C In tripod mode the focus point for contrast detect autofocus can be moved to any point in the frame using the multi selector To focus using contrast detect autofocus press an AF ON button The focus point will blink green and the monitor may brighten while the camera focuses If the camera is able to focus using contrast detect autofocus the focus point will be displayed in green if the camera is unable to focus the focus point will blink red Contrast detect AF point Manual focus focus mode M pg 83 Use zoom for precise focus 98 To preview exposure at current settings press In exposure modes other than exposure can be adjusted by pressing the amp button and rotating
216. n 65 FOCUS Mode isiisiniinisna aa ai 74 AF Area Mode wicescssesssssessesscssssssssssessssssscssssssssessestssesssssessessssessessessesesees 76 FOCUS Point SelectiOnssisisissscsssisssiiseiienissisrisscisieiisissisrniniisisiaiasia 78 FOCUS LOCkK ssssssssessessesesss Manual Focus Release Mode 85 Choosing a Release Mode ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesesstsesssssreosssssrsosesssre 86 Continuous MOE eessesssssssccssecessecesseccsseccnscessscesssccenscesseeeeaeeceaeeesssees 88 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View ssssssssssessessesss 90 Self Timer Mode Mirror UP MOd ou escsssccsssecssccsseccssecceseceesccessccsssccessecsacecsuceesseecsnscesees ISO Sensitivity 107 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually sssssesscsssssecsssescesnseeesnes 108 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control wn sessessceseescessesecssecscesseccesseesseseess 110 xi Exposure 113 Meteri g ccscicscsssscsecssscusscvsascsesisecuassoaseiesbecbeasdosbnsssoeetasusascasseoseeisesinns 114 Exposure MOCE cescsssscssssecsseccnsccersccssscesssecsssecsssccssccesscecsueecsueecsnseesees 116 P Programmed Auto ssssssscscsssseseeessssessecssseesseensseesessnneseseesens 118 5 Shutter Priority AUTO we scssssessscssssessecssseeseccssseessessneseesessee 120 A Aperture Priority AUTO ssssesssssssessseesssssseresssssrreresssereeesereeense 122 M ManUal sescssssscsssecsssescecseeccsusccssnsecesssecessseeessneesssuteccsneesenseessaees 124 Shutter Sp
217. n Description S Single frame Camera takes one photograph each time shutter default release button is pressed Continuous CL i Maon While shutter release button is held down camera ow speed i records photographs in continuous low speed or CH contnuous continuous high speed mode pg 88 high speed ae 1 Select Live view SHOOTING MENU o Color space In the shooting menu pg Eween 290 highlight Live view and a BO esti seins press gt MORSA EJ Interval timer shooting 2 Select Live view mode Live view Le Highlight Live view mode and t press gt Ap jp Release mode S 3 Selecta live view mode BB Live view 6 Live view mode Highlight the desired mode i M and press to return to the ca live view menu Trivod L2 4 Select Release mode E Live view a Highlight Release mode and Y Live view mode press gt AR F Release mode 92 5 Select arelease mode BS Live view E Release mode Highlight the release mode gt that will be during live view c CL Continuous low speed IE Ch Continuous high speed and press 6 Exitto shooting mode Press the shutter release button halfway I to exit the menus and return to shooting mode p 93 m 94 Hand Held Mode 1 Select live view mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Ly 2 Press the shutter release button all
218. n and pressing A aE The menu shown at right will be displayed pg 230 highlight the desired slot and press Choose slot Cancel 2 Press the center of the _ a multi selector to select the a oe highlighted picture t Fits Kok RA Selected pictures are marked E Aa by an icon When selecting cena pictures for printing press the O n button and press A or V to choose the number of copies 279 280 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures To deselect a picture highlight it and press center of multi selector 4 Press to complete the operation A confirmation dialog willbe displayed m highlight Yes and press Dy puter Delete Select this option to delete pictures and their associated voice memos Protected and hidden images will not be deleted Option Description r Selected Delete selected pictures Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for All playback pg 281 If two memory cards are inserted a slot selection dialog will be displayed before deletion Playback Folder Choose a folder for playback Option Description NC_D3 Pictures in all folders created with the D3 will be visible default during playback All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback Only pictures in the current folder will be visible Current 3 during playback Hide Image Hide or reveal selected pictures Hidden pi
219. n any form by any means without Nikon s prior written permission e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice Notices for Customers in the U S A e Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product e While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area address provided separately Federal Communications Commission FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
220. n independent power source an EH 6 AC adapter or an EN EL3e battery is recommended See the WT 4 manual for details 383 e Focusing Screens The focusing screens available for the D3 are listed below TypeB me Brite View NWZ type B focusing screen clear matte is supplied with the VI focusing camera screen Type E focusing screens are etched with a grid Type E making them suitable clear matte for copying and Viewfinder VI focusing architectural eyepiece screen photography Best accessories results are achieved with PC Nikkor lenses e Magnifier DG 2 The DG 2 magnifies the scene displayed in the viewfinder Use for close up photography copying telephoto lenses and other tasks that call for added precision DK 18 eyepiece adapter available separately required e Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK 14 DK 17A These viewfinder eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or cold conditions The DK 17A is equipped with a safety lock e Rubber Eyepiece Cup DK 19 The DK 19 makes the image in the viewfinder easier to see preventing eye fatigue 384 e Diopter adjustment viewfinder lenses To accommodate individual differences in vision viewfinder lenses are available with diopters of 3 2 0 1 and 2 m values with camera diopter control centered at 1 m Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustmen
221. n k EE E Rename Highlight the desired bank and press gt i 291 292 2 Entera name Keyboard area To move the cursor in the name EAO area press the E9 button and WRG ae as press lt or gt To enter a new a wwomeRstuvMxYZ I letter at the current cursor position use the multi selector erOCursor_Giinput_ COOK _ to highlight the desired Name area character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position press the f button To return to the shooting menu without changing the bank name press the MENU button Bank names can be up to twenty characters long Any characters after the twentieth will be deleted Save changes and exit After editing the name press to save changes and exit The Shooting menu bank menu will E Shooting menu bank be displayed E Rename SMM SNAP gt Reset Shooting Menu Choose whether to restore default settings for the current shooting menu bank See page 419 for a list of default settings With the exceptions of image quality image size white balance and ISO sensitivity shooting menu settings are not reset when a two button reset pg 206 is performed Option Description Yes Restore defaults for the current shooting menu bank No default Exit without changing shooting menu settings Active Folder Select the folder in which subsequent images wil
222. n slot 1 if the memory card is full an error will be displayed pg 412 Menu Option Playback Display mode Image review After delete Rotate tall Shooting all banks Shooting menu bank File naming Slot 2 Image quality Image size Image area JPEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance with fine tuning and presets d 0 d 4 Set Picture Control Color space Active D Lighting Long exp NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Live view Custom settings all banks All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings 355 356 Menu Option Video mode HDMI World time excepting date and time Language Image comment Auto image rotation Voice memo Setup Voice memo overwrite Voice memo button Audio output USB Image authentication GPS Non CPU lens data My Menu All My Menu items Settings saved using the D3 can be restored by selecting Load settings Note that Save load settings is only available when a memory card is inserted in slot 1 and that the Load settings option is only available if the card in slot 1 contains saved settings the memory card in slot 2 can not be used to save or load settings Saved Settings Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP2 The camera will not be able to load settings if t
223. nce bracketing Ge 24 Ato bracketing set Choose WB bracketing for Custom 4 a AER Setting e4 Auto bracketing set pg ik 327 WB WB bracketing OK 2 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the top control panel Number of shots BKT button Main command s WB bracketing dial Paty indicator At settings other than zero a WB oa Guam bracketing indicator will appear in the Pog he T top control panel and a m icon will be displayed in the top and rear control panels 139 140 3 Select a white balance increment Pressing the BKT button rotate the sub command dial to choose the white balance adjustment Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired White balance on increment hy JB BKT button Sub command Top control panel dial Choose from increments of 1 5 mired 2 10 mired or 3 15 mired Higher B values correspond to increased amounts of blue higher A values to increased amounts of amber pg 148 The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below No of White balance Control panel display shots increment Bracketing order EVs ae ee Ge stsansee 0 1 0 HJF 3 TET paperen H 3 1B 1B 0 2B AJE
224. ncluding Reflex Nikkor lenses e Improves the precision of center weighted and spot metering and i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Focal Length Not Listed If the correct focal length is not listed choose the closest value greater than the actual focal length of the lens Zoom Lenses Lens data are not adjusted when non CPU lenses are zoomed in or out After changing the zoom position select new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture BE The Non CPU Lens Data Menu 1 Select Non CPU lens data Highlight Non CPU lens data in the setup menu pg 344 and press P SETUP MENU e Wireless transmitter Image authentication t R Save load settings GPS Virtual horizon a Non CPU lens data No 1 AF fine tune Firmware version Select a lens number Highlight Lens number and press lt or P to choose a lens number between 1 and 9 Non CPU lens data Done Lens number E Focal length mm Maximum aperture Move Select a focal length Highlight Focal length mm and press lt or gt to choose a focal length between 6 and 4 000 mm Non CPU lens data Done Lens number a Focal length mm m Maximum aperture Move Select amaximum aperture Highlight Maximum aperture and press lt or gt to choose a maximum aperture between f 1 2 and f 22 The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the Non CPU lens data Done Lens number E
225. nd one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s Live view not used e Nikon standard Approximately 4 700 shots Measured at 20 C 68 F with an AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8 ED lens under the following test conditions image quality set to JPEG normal image size set to L large shutter speed 1 250 s shutter release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off The following can reduce battery life e Using the monitor e Keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway e Repeated autofocus operations e Taking NEF RAW or TIFF RGB photographs e Slow shutter speeds e Using the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter e Using VR vibration reduction mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN EL4a batteries e Keep the battery contacts clean Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance e Use batteries immediately after charging Batteries will lose their charge if left unused e Check the condition of the battery regularly using the Battery info option in the setup menu pg 353 If calibration is recommended calibrate the battery using the MH 22 quick charger 437 438 Index Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Symbols S
226. ng os 35 yellow orange red and green pg 173 Sa Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from SF B amp W black and white the default setting Sepia 8 El Toning Cyanotype blue tinted monochrome Red Yellow e Green Blue Green Blue Purple Blue and Red Purple pg 173 171 M A Auto Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame Use a type Gor D lens for best results The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid and lines appear parallel to the axes of the grid The Picture Control Grid Pressing the S button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected Release the S button to return to the Picture Control menu Previous Settings The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting Use this as a reference when adjusting settings 172 Filter Effects Monochrome Only The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs The following filter effects are available Option Description Yellow Enhances contrast Can be used to tone down the brightness Orange of the sk
227. nitor see page 90 Focus and Shoot 1 Press the shutter release button halfway to focus pg 56 At default settings the J camera will focus on the subject in the center Buffer focus point Frame a indicator capacity photo in the viewfinder with the main subject positioned in the center focus point and press the shutter release button halfway If the camera is able to focus the in focus indicator will appear in the viewfinder Viewfinder display Description J Subject in focus gt Focus point is between camera and subject lt Focus point is behind subject gt lt Camera unable to focus on subject in focus blinks point using autofocus While the shutter release button is pressed halfway focus will lock and the number of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer 7 pg 88 will be shown in the viewfinder display For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus using autofocus see Getting Good Results with Autofocus pg 82 55 56 2 Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot Smoothly press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the picture Access lamp While the photograph is being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the card slot cover will light Do not eject the memory card turn the camera off or remove or disco
228. nlight Color temp Option K Description 4 Flash 5 400 Use with optional flash units Cloudy 6 000 Use in daylight under overcast skies f Shade 8 000 Use in daylight with subjects in the shade 2 500 Choose color temperature from list of 10 000 values pg 151 Use subject light source or existing PRE Preset manual photograph as reference for white balance pg 152 All values are approximate Fine tuning set to 0 Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources If the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balance choose an option from the list above or use preset white balance I Choose color temp White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the rear control panel q e o P o ISO QUAL WB mc OC z HAS WB button Main command dial Rear control panel The White Balance Menu White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance option in the shooting menu pg 290 a Fluorescent Selecting fluorescent with the WB button and main command dial selects the type of bulb chosen for the Fluorescent option in the white balance menu pg 290 145 146 Studio Flash Lighting Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units Choose a color temperature
229. nnect the power source until the lamp has gone out The Shutter Release Button The camera has a two stage shutter release button The camera focuses when the shutter release button is pressed halfway To take the photograph press the shutter release button the rest of the way down F gt N Za Focus Take photograph Viewing Photographs 1 Press the button The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor 2 View additional pictures Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing lt or P _ Ss ie Ta pe To view additional information 119 NIKON 03 on the current photograph 0 press A and W pg 231 AS OR P 1 125 F5 6 200 85mm MBAUTO 0 O AdobeRGB FSD E 100NC_D3 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 12 2007 10 16 00 4256x2832 The card containing the current photograph is indicated by an icon as shown at right PONC_D3 DSC_0001 JPG 2 2007 10 16 00 42 To end playback and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu pg 287 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 20 s the default setting after shooting 57 58 Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor press the button Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted
230. nt temperatures this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected In exposure modes other than manual close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure Some noise may be audible when zoom lenses are zoomed in or out or shutter speed is changed in exposure mode P or 5 To reduce blur in tripod mode choose On for Custom Setting d8 Exposure delay mode pg 324 Self Timer Mode The self timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self portraits To use the self timer mount the camera on a tripod recommended or place the camera on a stable level surface and follow the steps below 1 Select self timer mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to iO Release mode dial 2 Frame the photograph and _ Focus mode focus selector In single servo autofocus pg 74 photographs can only be taken if the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder v i aq Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter In exposure modes other than manual close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure 103 p 104 3 Start the timer a Press the shutter release Vikon os At button all the way down to
231. nt with fine approx 1 4 normal approx 1 8 or basic approx 1 16 compression Size priority Optimal quality compression available e NEF RAW JPEG Single photograph recorded in both NEF RAW and JPEG formats Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome storage for up to nine custom Picture Controls Media Type and Il CompactFlash memory cards UDMA compliant microdrives 427 Storage Double slot Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup storage or for separate storage of NEF RAW and JPEG images File system DCF Design Rule for Camera File System 2 0 DPOF Digital Print Order Format Exif 2 21 Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras PictBridge Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye level pentaprism single lens reflex viewfinder Frame coverage Approx 100 horizontal and 100 vertical Magnification Approx 0 7 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m Eyepoint 18 mm 1 0 m7 Diopter adjustment 3 1 m Focusing screen Ships with type B BriteView Clear Matte VI screen Reflex mirror Quick return Depth of field preview When depth of field preview button is pressed lens aperture is stopped down to value selected by user A and M modes or by camera F and amp modes Lens aperture Instant return electronically controlled Lens Compatible lenses e DX AF Nikkor Al
232. ntains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 the shutter release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken To continue shooting create a folder with a number less than 999 or select an existing folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images Number of Folders Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of folders 295 296 File Naming Photographs are saved using file names consisting of DSC_ or in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space _DSC followed by a four digit number and a three letter extension e g DSC 0001 JPG The File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the DSC portion of the file name For information on editing file names see steps 2 and 3 of Renaming Shooting Menu Banks pg 292 Note that the portion of the name that can be edited is a maximum of three characters long Extensions The following extensions are used NEF for NEF RAW images TIF for TIFF RGB images JPG for JPEG images and NDF for dust off reference data Slot 2 Choose the role played by the secondary card slot when two memory cards are inserted in the camera pg 71 Image Quality Choose image quality pg 65 Image Size Choose the size at which pictures are recorded pg 69 Image Area Although the D3 can record photographs with the same diagonal pictur
233. nu pg 290 then PR highlight a white balance as option and press If an option other than Fluorescent Choose color temp or Preset manual is selected proceed to Step 2 If Fluorescent is selected highlight a lighting type and press If Choose color temp is selected highlight a color temperature and press If Preset manual is selected choose a preset as described on page 161 before proceeding 147 2 Fine tune white balance E White balance 148 Use the multi selector to fine tune white balance White balance can be fine tuned on the amber A blue B axis and the green G magenta M Coordinates Adjustment axis The horizontal amber blue axis corresponds to color temperature with each increment equivalent to about 5 mired The vertical green magenta axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation CC filters Increase green Green G A G rs Blue B Coj Amber A Increase magenta Magenta M Increase blue Increase amber Press 8 Press to save settings and return to the shooting menu If white balance has been fine tuned on the A B axis a lt gt icon will be displayed in the rear control panel White Balance Fine Tuning The colors on the fine tuning axes are relative not absolute For example moving the cursor to B blue when a warm setting such as amp incandescent is selected for white
234. oand selected for Image review in manual playback menu pg 287 recording will begin when shutter release button is released after shooting Recording ends when button is pressed or after specified recording time has ended He Manual Memo can be recorded for most recent photograph only by pressing and holding button pg 250 248 HE Voice Memo Overwrite This option controls whether the voice memo for the most recent photograph can be overwritten in shooting mode The following options are available Option Description Disable default Voice memo can not be recorded in shooting mode if one already exists for most recent image Enable Voice memo can be recorded in shooting mode even if one already exists for most recent image pg 250 Existing memo will be deleted and replaced by new memo HE Voice Memo Button This option controls manual recording The following options are available Option Description Pressand Voice memo is recorded while amp V hold button is held down Recording default will end automatically after 60 s Recording begins when Pressto button is pressed and ends OX start when button is pressed again stop Recording will end automatically after 60 s Voice Memo L Voice memo overwrite LA Disable Lo e Enable E Voice memo button Press and hold 5 amp amp Press to start stop The option selected
235. ocked at highest f number If FE E is displayed in the top control panel select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f7 Customize command dials gt Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture e Exposure mode S selected with tu L amp selected for shutter speed 42 49 380 120 Photos are out of focus e Rotate focus mode selector to orC e Camera unable to focus using autofocus use manual focus or focus lock 74 80 83 403 404 Problem Solution Page Flash in use Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting Full range of shutter e1 Flash sync speed when using 325 speeds not available optional SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 Speedlight choose 1 250 s Auto FP for full range of shutter speeds Focus doesnot lock which Camera is in focus mode C use AE L shutter release button is 81 AF L button to lock focus pressed halfway a can Torpe Image quality set to NEF RAW 69 e Unlock focus selector lock 78 e Auto area AF selected for focus 76 mode choose another mode Can not select focus point she camera i i playback mode of e The camera is in menu operation 277 e Press shutter release button 50 halfway to turn monitor off or activate exposure meters Camera is slow to record Turn long exposure noise reduction 299 photos off e Sound of mirror clicking down 96 when shutter release button was pressed halfway in han
236. od is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera BE Choosing a Flash Mode To choose the flash mode press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode is selected in the top control panel 4 button Main command dial Front curtain sync Slow sync Rear curtain sync Ao REAR Red eye reduction with Red eye reduction 3 slow sync 3 4 1 Available only in exposure modes P and A In modes Sand M front curtain sync is selected when button is released 2 In exposure modes F and A flash sync mode will be set to slow rear curtain sync when the button is released Slow 3 icon blinks if flash unit does not support red eye reduction REAR 4 Red eye reduction with slow sync is available only in exposure modes F and A In modes and M red eye reduction is selected when the button is released 199 200 Studio Flash Systems Rear curtain sync can not be used with studio flash systems as the correct synchronization can not be obtained Shutter Speed and Aperture Shutter speed and aperture can be set as follows when a Speedlight is used Mode Shutter speed Aperture See page p Set automatically by camera 1 1 1 2 A 118 1 250 s 60 s Set automatically 5 Value selected by user by camera 120 1 250 s 30 s 2 Set automatically by camera A 1 1 1 2 122 250 s 60 s Value selected e Value selected by user by user 124 i 1 250 s 30
237. od socket 5 Shutter release button for Vertical SHOOTING sseseccseeceseees 54 BE Attaching the Camera Strap Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera body as shown below Camera Body Continued 11 12 1 Viewfinder eyepiece 47 2 Eyepiece shutter lever 47 3 t delete button 58 245 nm format DUTTON 45 4 gt playback button 57 228 5 MONitOr esses 57 90 228 6 MENU menu button 26 277 7 E thumbnail playback ZOOM button uu 242 243 8 Om protect button help button BB info DUTTON ssssss000000000000001 M The Speaker and Microphone 13 14 15 9 OK DUTTON essseessssessseesssees 28 10 Speaker cessccsssccsseeccesseesseeees 254 11 Rear control panel 10 322 12 ISO ISO sensitivity button 108 Two button reset button 206 13 QUAL image quality size 14 WB white balance DUTTON weiss 145 150 151 Two button reset button 206 15 Microphone sssssccssesccesseesssees 248 Do not bring magnetic devices such as microdrive cards close to the built in speaker or microphone 1 Viewfinder ou escsescsseessseesseessssees 47 Art AE AF lock button PTPRE ETE EEE 80 81 338 3 AF ON AF ON button 75 97 4 Main command dial 006 16 5 Multi Sele CtOl eec
238. of shots remaining before memory buffer fills 88 Capture mode indicatov 256 Aperture stop indicator 123 381 Aperture f number 122 124 Aperture number of STOPS nieue 123 381 Exposure and flash bracketing INCFEMAN cceccessesesseseseesesseseeee 136 WB bracketing increment 140 Number of shots per interval sssini 216 Maximum aperture NON CPU lenses uu PC mode indicator 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 20 Battery indicator 48 Frame COUN ecseecseecsecsseeseeneens 49 Preset white balance recording indicatov Manual lens number K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSUFES ssssesccsesccsseessseeseeeeseeens 49 FV lock indicator csseccsseecsees 202 Flash sync indicatot 0 325 Clock battery indicator 41 393 GPS connection indicator 224 Focus mode indicator 74 Interval timer indicator 216 Multiple exposure INICATOL seeeeescesssssecccnssseceseenssees Aperture lock icon 24 25 26 27 28 29 29 Image comment indicator 348 Beep indicator ssssssssssssesses 319 Exposure compensation INd CAtOT esiis 132 Exposure and flash bracketing INA CATOT ssasssesssinssessesasecosoninisseocense 135 White balance bracketing INGICATOT csssscsisasecsstnnszasconnsesesntens 139 Electronic analog exposure 0 0 Ar 126 Exposure compensation
239. of tir bt is currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time is in less than a minute a warning will be displayed in the monitor The Viewfinder Eyepiece In exposure modes other than manual close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure 215 216 M out of Memory If the memory card is full the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken Resume shooting pg 217 after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card vV Bracketing Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography If exposure and or flash bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program During Shooting During interval timer photography the icon in the top control panel will blink Immediately before the next shooting interval APS REM begins the shutter speed display will show the S46 number of intervals remaining and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval At
240. oints including 15 cross type sensors Detection range 1 19 EV ISO 100 20 C 68 F Lens servo e Autofocus Single servo AF S continuous servo AF 0 predictive focus tracking automatically activated according to subject status e Manual M Electronic range finding supported Focus point Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points AF area mode Single point AF dynamic area AF automatic area AF Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter release button halfway single servo AF or by pressing AE L AF L button Flash Flash control e TIL i TTL balanced fill flash and standard i TTL flash for digital SLR using combined 1 005 segment RGB sensor are available with SB 800 SB 600 or SB 400 e Auto aperture Available with SB 800 and CPU lens e Non TTL auto Supported flash units include SB 800 SB 28 SB 27 and SB 22s e Range priority manual Available with SB 800 Flash mode Front curtain sync slow sync rear curtain sync red eye reduction red eye reduction with slow sync Flash ready indicator Lights when Speedlight such as SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 80DX SB 28DxX or SB 50DxX is fully charged blinks after flash is fired at full output Flash Accessory shoe Standard ISO 518 hot shoe contact with safety lock Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB 800 or System CLS SU 800 as
241. on is pressed and AE lock remains locked until the button is pressed a second me Reset on f time the shutter is released or the exposure meters release turn off Exposure locks when the AF ON button is pressed and a AE lock AEN Hold remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off fia AF lock only Focus locks while the AF 0N button is pressed 311 a10 Vertical AF Choose the function assigned to the AF ON button for vertical shooting ON Button o a 5 D AO Option Description Same as AF ON Both AF ON buttons perform the function selected for Custom Setting a9 AF ON Pressing the vertical AF ON button initiates AF ON default autofocus i AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the vertical AF ON button is pressed fa AE lock only Exposure locks while the vertical AF ON button is pressed AE lock Reset on release me Exposure locks when the vertical AF ON button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time the shutter is released or the exposure meters turn off G3 AE lock Hold Exposure locks when the vertical AF ON button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off fia AF lock only Focus locks while the vertical AF ON button is pressed 312 b Metering Exposure b1
242. only to vary only exposure or Flash only to vary only flash level 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the top control panel Number of shots Top control panel BKT button Main command dial Exposure and flash bracketing indicator At settings other than zero a m icon and exposure and flash bracketing indicator will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel 135 3 Select an exposure increment Pressing the BKT button rotate the sub command dial to choose the exposure increment Exposure increment BKT button At default settings the size of the increment can be chosen from 1 3 2 3 and 1 EV The bracketing programs with an increment of 3 EV are listed below Control panel display No of shots Bracketing order EVs DETI oe ET 0 0 FF no beg 3 0 3 0 0 7 oe JE m 3 sivaanceed 3 0 3 0 7 0 PPFD eei 2 0 0 3 2 PF r 3 N 2 0 0 3 SE ati 3 0 0 3 0 3 GET J iti 5 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 0 7 SE AD Ge renner g 7 0 1 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 reat LEANEN 0 7 1 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 7 0 3 GFA vovas 9 0 3 0 7 1 0 1 3 See Also For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment see Custom Setting b2 EV step
243. oosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid Not available with Neutral Monochrome or custom Picture Controls Sharpening Control the sharpness of outlines Select A to adjust sharpening automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 0 no sharpening and 9 the higher the value the greater the sharpening Contrast 5 043U0 24N DIq IV sjuawjsn pe jenuey Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 choose lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from being washed out in direct sunlight higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low contrast subjects Choose 1 for reduced brightness 1 for enhanced Brightness brightness Does not affect exposure s Control the vividness of colors Select A to adjust S Saturation saturation automatically according to the type of scene 3 z or choose from values between 3 and 3 lower 3 A values reduce saturation and higher values increase it 55 Choose negative values to a minimum of 3 to make 3 5 H reds more purple blues more green and greens more s3 se yellow positive values up to 3 to make reds more orange greens more blue and blues more purple Filter Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome 35 effects photographs Choose from Off the default setti
244. op Press S button and rotate main command dial left to increase the size of the crop Rotate the main command dial to switch between aspect ratios of 3 2 4 3 and 5 4 Increase size of crop Change crop aspect ratio Use multi selector to move crop to other Move cro P area of image Press center of multi selector to preview Preview crop cropped image Create copy Save the current crop as a separate file 365 Trim Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG or TIFF RGB photos have an image quality pg 65 of JPEG fine cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio Aspect ratio Possible sizes 35 3 424 x 2 280 2 560 x 1 704 1 920 x 1 280 1 280 x 856 i 960 x 640 640 x 424 3 424 x 2 568 2 560 X 1 920 1 920 x 1 440 1 280 x 960 i 960 x 720 640 x 480 es 3 216 x 2 568 2 400 x 1 920 1 808 x 1 440 1 200 x 960 i 896 x 720 608 x 480 Monochrome Copy photographs in Black and white E Monochrome Sepia or Cyanotype blue and white monochrome Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview of the selected image press A to increase color saturation W to decrease Press to create a monochrome copy 366 Y Black and white gt c Sepia E Cyanotype Increase saturation m J
245. option pg 60 in the shooting menu a 238 HE Overview Data P 1 8000 F2 8 EJH1 0 3 85mm 4 1 3 aE 4 REAR 1 Folder number frame number 2 VOICE MEMO ICON eeeeeseeseeeee 248 3 Protect status oe esessesseeceees 244 4 Camera name 5 Retouch indicator 360 6 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the image pg 234 Horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness vertical axis shows number of pixels of each brightness in image 7 IS sensitivity oes 108 8 Focal length 382 9 GPS data indicator 223 10 Image comment indicator 348 11 Flash Mode wu eesssssssessseenseeesees 197 12 Flash compensation 13 Exposure compensation 132 14 Metering method 114 15 Exposure MOE esesssssseeeeeees 116 16 Shutter speed eee 120 124 17 Aperture sessesesesssossssssssss 122 124 1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on ER 239 240 i 100NC_D3 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 12 2007 10 16 00 f ma m4256x2832 l 26 25 2423 22 21 18 Picture CONntrol un 26 Folder NaMe sseseccsssesessseeeseeees 19 Active D Lighting 27 Date of recording 20 File NAME sssssssssssssssrrssssssrresssssrrs 28 Slot NUMDEL scsesccsseecessseeeseeees 21 Image quality eesessessssecees 29 White balance ssssesecsesseees 22 IMAGE SiZe sssssssss
246. opy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a amp icon fi 100NC_D3 NORMAL C_0007 J 15 12 2007 10 26 00 104256x2832 m Retouching Copies Copies created with Trim can not be further modified D lighting red eye correction filter effects and color balance can not be applied to monochrome copies Otherwise the options in the retouch menu can each be applied once to existing copies although this may result in loss of detail Image Quality Except in the case of copies created with Trim pg 366 and Image overlay copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original copies created from NEF RAW photos are saved as large fine quality JPEG images and copies created from TIFF RGB photos are saved as fine quality JPEG images of the same size as the original Size priority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format D Lighting D Lighting brightens shadows making it ideal for dark or backlit Before Press A or W to choose the amount of correction performed The effect can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph v Mancel EQZoom OWSave 363 Red Eye Correction This option is used to correct red eye caused by the flash and is available only with photographs taken using the flash The photograph selected for red eye correction is previewed as shown at right Confirm the effects of red eye correc
247. or press to proceed to step 5 to save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further modification E Manage Picture Control 10 Choose Picture Control ESD Standard Y ENL Neutral E GAdiust 4 Edit the selected control See page 171 for more information To abandon any changes and start over press the button Press when settings are complete Vivid A Quick adjust Sharpening Y Contrast Brightness Saturation GQGrid OROK Reset 5 Select a destination Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt E Manage Picture Control Oy Save as PECA Unused ECT Unused 175 176 6 Name the Picture Control wm o123456789 Keyboard f gt 70MBCDEFGHI area The text entry dialog shown P CULES at right will be displayed By Name area default new Picture cai O E Controls are named by adding a two digit number assigned automatically to the name of the existing Picture Control This name can be edited to create a new name as described below To move the cursor in the name area press the EE button and press lt or gt To enter a new letter at the current cursor position use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position press the t button Custom Picture Control names can be up to 19 chara
248. ot through 99 and a e either i GQGrid Confirm e press to view current T MONOCHROME 02 Picture Control settings or a Sharpening Contrast Y Brightness Filter effects Toning rea Cyanotype 4 oO GQGrid Done e press to display E Manage Picture Control confirmation dialog shown at pd i Delete Picture Control right Y MONOCHROME 02 Yes No 4 Select Yes gt Manage Picture Control Delete from card Highlight Yes and press to DG Delete Picture contro delete the selected Picture a MONOCHRONE 02 Control No 184 Active D Lighting Active D Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows creating photographs with natural contrast Use for high contrast scenes for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day High 7 gt Active D Lighting Normal Active D Lighting off Active D Lighting Low 185 186 To use active D lighting 1 Select Active D Lighting F SHOOTING MENU E PEG compression In the shooting menu pg 290 EE NEF RAW recording A highlight Active D Lighting N a and press P E El Long exp NR OFF 2 Choosean option E Active DLiohting e Highlight Off Low t EAH High Normal or High and H press a M Active D Lighting Additional time is required to record images when Active D ligh
249. other times the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway once the button is released the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off To view current interval timer settings select Interval timer shooting Interval timer shooting between shots While A Stat interval timer photography is in progress the 7 Off interval timer menu will show the starting time ca corer the current time and the number of intervals 2 pone and shots remaining None of these items can GI GMove Set 13 38 be changed while interval timer photography is in progress BE Pausing Interval Timer Photography Interval time photography can be paused by e Pressing the amp button between intervals e Highlighting Start gt Pause in the interval timer menu and pressing e Turning the camera off and then on again if desired the memory card can be replaced while the camera is off Selecting live view self timer or mirror up Mup release modes To resume shooting 1 Choose anew starting E Interval timer shooting e Choose start time trigger E Y IEA Start time Choose a new starting trigger d y and start time as described 00a 200e on page 213 A OMove OSet SIERE 2 Resume shooting E Interval timer shooting A Start Highlight Start gt Restart and press Note that
250. otographs can be taken Speedlight SB 80DX SB 30 SB 27 SB 23 5B 292 SB 28DX SB SODX SB 22s SB 22 SB 2182 SB 28 SB 26 SB 20 SB 295 i Flash mode SB 25 SB 24 SB 16B SB 15 A Non TTL auto Y Y M Manual Y Y Y Y ma Repeating flash Y REAR Rear curtain sync Vv Vv Vv Vv 1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter release is disabled Set flash unit to A non TTL auto flash 2 Autofocus is only available with AF Micro lenses 60 mm 105 mm or 200 mm I Notes on Optional Speedlights Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions If the Speedlight supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System refer to the section on CLS compatible digital SLR cameras The D3 is not included in the digital SLR category in the SB 80DX SB 28DX and SB 50DX manuals i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 6400 At values over 6400 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings If the flash ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed 194 Auto power zoom is available with SB 800 and SB 600 flash units The SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 provide red eye reduction When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 24 105 mm the SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provide active AF assist illumination for the following fo
251. produce passports issued by the government licenses issued by public agencies and private groups ID cards and tickets such as passes and meal coupons Comply with copyright notices The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books music paintings woodcuts prints maps drawings movies and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user s responsibility Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person erase all data using commercial deletion software or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information for example pictures of empty sky Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circ
252. product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste e For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner digital camera or other device may be punishable by law e Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced Do not copy or reproduce paper money coins securities government bonds or local government bonds even if such copies or reproductions are stamped Sample The copying or reproduction of paper money coins or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained the copying or reproduction or unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited e Cautions on certain copies and reproductions The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies shares bills checks gift certificates etc commuter passes or coupon tickets except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company Also do not copy or re
253. r or No border then press to select and return to previous menu m Border APrinter default Print with border No border Time stamp 266 Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or W to choose Printer default default for current printer Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu y Time stamp APrinter default Print time stamp No time stamp Option Description Menu shown at right will be 7i Comping displayed To exit without cropping picture highlight No cropping and press To crop yam picture highlight Crop and press gt Cropping jf Crop is selected dialog rE shown at right will be displayed Rotate main command dial to right to increase size of crop left to decrease Choose position of crop using multi selector and Scroll OK press Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press Start printing p Printing Cancel m Selecting Photographs for Printing Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW or TIFF RGB pg 65 can not be selected for printing See Also See page 415 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing 267 Printing Multiple Pictures 1 Display the PictBridge menu Press the MENU button in the PictBrid
254. r release button is pressed halfway or any of the MODE 4 BKT ISO QUAL or WB button is pressed Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay or an optional EH 6 AC adapter is used setting will also end when the exposure meters turn off 341 342 f9 No Memory Card At the default setting of Enable release the shutter can be released when no memory card is inserted although no pictures will be recorded they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode If Release locked is selected the shutter release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera Note that when photographs are being captured to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately photographs are not recorded to the camera memory card and the shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this option 10 Reverse Indicators At the default setting of het inistininiee 07 the exposure indicators in the top control panel and shooting information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right Select guisihininteth 70 to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right 343 T The Setup Menu Camera Setup The setup menu contains the options listed below For information on using the setup menu see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 26 Option See page
255. r the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX available separately for more information see the Capture NX manual Dust off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended When using a zoom lens zoom all the way in 1 Select Start E Dust off ref photo Highlight Start and press The message shown at right will be E Dust off ref photo displayed and rEF will appear in the i i i PM Take photo of brich viewfinder and control panel displays i teres oe E To exit without acquiring image dust off EE anfemiens iniy data press MENU a 2 Framea featureless white object in the viewfinder With the lens about ten centimeters four inches from a well lit featureless white object frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter release button halfway In autofocus mode focus will automatically be set to infinity in manual focus mode set focus to infinity manually 351 3 Acquire dust off reference data Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data The monitor turns off when the shutter release button is pressed If the reference object is too bright or too dark the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data ag sia and the message shown at right will be Satins aha ty sai displayed Choose another reference obje
256. rame 86 Remote cord 388 Reset 206 293 303 418 Reset custom settings 303 Reset shooting menu 293 Reverse indicators 343 RGB color space 188 RGB histogram 233 282 Rotate tall 287 S S single point AF 76 S single servo AF 74 80 S small 69 Save load settings 355 Saving camera settings 355 Self timer delay 318 Sensitivity 107 Set Picture Control 166 Monochrome 168 Filter effects 171 173 Toning 171 173 Neutral 168 Standard 168 Vivid 168 Setup menu 344 Shooting data 235 236 237 Shooting info display 323 Shooting menu 290 Shooting menu bank 291 Shooting speed 320 Shutter speed 120 127 auto FP high speed sync 190 197 325 flash sync speed 197 325 lock 127 Shutter priority auto 120 Shutter release button 3 56 Shutter release button AE L 317 Side by side comparison 371 Single point AF 76 Size 69 Slide show 288 Frame interval 288 Slide show 288 Slot 2 71 296 Backup 71 Overflow 71 RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 71 Slot selection 160 230 272 279 361 Slow sync 197 Speedlight 190 Spot 114 316 T Television 274 Ten pin remote terminal 4 223 388 Thumbnail 241 330 TIFF RGB 65 Time 39 347 Time exposure 126 388 Timer 103 213 Trim 365 Two button reset 206 U USB 257 350 Mass Storage 257 350 MTP PTP 257 350 USB 256 350 cable i 256 V Vertical AF ON button 312 Ver
257. re Control Color Space sescsseccsseesseeees 7 Active D Lighting 0 scsssssccssseccssssscsseessssseccsseececntecssneeessaseess Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction 299 High ISONR assises 299 ISO Sensitivity Settings ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessssssesssssssserserrsseee 300 Live VIEW sssesssssssssssseesseressse 300 Multiple Exposure 300 Interval Timer SHOOTING cssssccssesscssseccsseeeecssecessntecssneeeeees 300 xiv Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings s 301 G Custom Setting Bank scsssssssessseesseesececeseesseeeeeeessees 303 B Reset Custom Settings ssssseeseeeessssssecseccecececeesseceeseennees 303 SAULOTOCUS ssissscassssassacosiaaseendeansiaesetsusnassconaascas onnbsescSiaissasnenadsasssiees 304 a1 AF C Priority Selection sssssssssccssecsssesecesseeseseeeenseees 304 a2 AF S Priority Selection 305 a3 Dynamic AF Area 306 a4 Focus Tracking with Lock On 308 a5 AF ACTIVATION seesssesssessssesssessseesssessseessssessessssessssessseess 308 a6 FOCUS Point Illumination 00 essssssessceesseseceesssseecsccsnsees 309 a7 FOCUS Point Wrap Around ssesscssseccsssccesseeeesetecenseees 310 a8 AF Point Selection sssssessssssssseseesssseeceecsssessecsnseesecesnsess 310 a9 AF ON Button 311 a10 Vertical AF ON Button 312 Metering Exposure 06 313 b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value ou eeeecsssessccseccesetecc
258. re Control E Load save After displaying the Load save menu as described in pti Step 1 on page 178 highlight C Copy to card and press gt g a 2 Select a Picture Control E Manage Picture Control RAKE Highlight a custom Picture a a Control and press gt Any Picture Controls that may already have been saved to the selected slot will be overwritten Saving Custom Picture Controls Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time The memory card can only be used to store user created custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card 3 Choose a destination Manage Picture Control 1 Choose destination 4101 STANDARD 02 Choose a destination from slots ice NEUTRAL 02 4103 MONOCHROME 02 1 through 99 and press to a save the selected Picture B Control to the memory card i 07 Unused Managing Custom Picture Controls Follow the steps below to rename or delete custom Picture Controls EE Renaming Custom Picture Controls 1 Select Rename In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight Rename and press gt Manage Picture Control Le Save edit U Delete R Load save Select a Picture Control Highlight a custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt Manage Picture Control E Rename EECV IV ID 02 II ate STANDARD 02 e Rename the Pict
259. recompensation Choose exposure mode F 5 or A 132 can not be used Reddish areas appearin Reddish areas and uneven textures photos may appear in long time exposures Turn long exposure 299 Textures are uneven noise reduction on when shooting at shutter speeds of kek w BE Playback Problem Solution Page Flashing areas appear in images Shooting data appear Press A or W to choose photo 231 282 on images information displayed A graph appears during playback NEF RAW image is _ Photo was taken at image quality of NEF 66 not played back JPEG Some photos are not displayed during Select All for Playback folder 281 playback Tall portrait e Select On for Rotate tall 287 orientation photos _ Photo was taken with Off selected 349 are displayed in for Auto image rotation wide landscape e Camera was pointed up or down 349 orientation when photo was taken Can not delete photo Photo is protected remove protection 244 Message is displayed stating that D Select AIl for Playback folder 281 images are available for playback P change print Memory card is full delete photos 49 Photo is in NEF RAW format Transfer Can not select photo for printing to computer and print using supplied 262 software or Capture NX e Set USB to MTP PTP 350 e NEF RAW and TIFF photos can notbe 262 i printed by direct USB connection Us
260. remote wireless flash units e FV lock pg 201 Locks flash level at the metered value allowing a series of photographs to be taken at the same flash level e Auto FP High Speed Sync pg 200 Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field The CLS compatible D3 can be used for flash photography when an optional Speedlight is mounted on the camera s accessory shoe A flash can be used not only when natural lighting is inadequate but also to fill in shadows illuminate back lit subjects and even to add a catch light to the eyes of a portrait subject See the Speedlight manual for details Compatible Flash Units CLS Compatible Flash Units The D3 can be used with the following CLS compatible flash units the SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and SU 800 Hl The SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 The principal features of these flash units are listed below Flash unit Feature SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 Guide ISO 100 38 125 30 98 21 69 10 32 No 1S0200 53 175 42 138 30 98 14 49 Auto power zoom 24 105 mm 24 85 mm Wide panel 14 mm 17 mm 14 mm 60 down 7 down 90 up 90 up 180 _ toward lens Head rotation 180 left 90 right left 90 right 90 up light axis 45 up away from light axis 1 Controlled remotely using optional SB 800
261. rmat can be connected to the camera s ten pin remote terminal using an MC 35 GPS adapter cord available separately pg 388 allowing information on the camera s current position to be recorded when photographs are taken Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector These devices connect to the MC 35 using a cable with a D sub 9 pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device See the MC 35 instruction manual for details Before turning the camera on set the GPS device to NMEA mode 4800 baud 223 When the camera establishes 7 communication with a GPS device a amp icon P ie5 F55 will be displayed in the top control panel ifs a Photo information for pictures taken while a sY the amp icon is displayed will include an additional page pg 238 recording the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading If no data are received from the GPS unit for two seconds the amp icon will clear from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS information GPS Data GPS data are only recorded when the E icon is displayed Confirm that the W icon is displayed in the top control panel before shooting A flashing amp icon indicates that the GPS device is cam G S47 searching for a signal pictures taken while the amp icon is flashing will not include GPS data 224
262. rom strong magnetic fields Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor damage data stored on the memory card or affect the product s internal circuitry Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs Cleaning When cleaning the camera body use a blower to gently remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly In rare instances static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or go dark This does not indicate a malfunction and the display will soon return to normal The lens and mirror are easily damaged Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower When using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully See The Low Pass Filter pg 395 for information on cleaning the
263. rture ring is selected and a CPU lens with an aperture ring is attached Note that regardless of the setting chosen the aperture ring must be used to adjust aperture when a non CPU lens is attached Menus and playback At the default setting of Off the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback highlight thumbnails and navigate menus If On is selected the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback move the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback and move the menu highlight bar up or down The sub command dial is used to display additional photo information in full frame playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback While menus are displayed rotating the sub command dial right displays the sub menu for the selected option while rotating it left displays the previous menu To make a selection press the center of the multi selector or 340 f8 Release Button to Use Dial This option allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released At the default setting of No the button must be pressed while the command dial is rotated If Yes is selected the setting can be changed by rotating the command dial after the button is released Setting ends when the button is pressed again the shutte
264. s The same slot 2 method can be used to choose a slot when selecting images for operations in the playback Cancel pg 278 or retouch menus pg 360 or when choosing an image as the source for preset white balance pg 160 See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are performed see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 318 The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed so that the A and buttons display other images and the lt and gt buttons control photo information See Custom Setting f3 Photo info playback pg 331 for details Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full frame playback There are up to 7 pages of information for each photo Press A or W to cycle through photo information as shown below Note that shooting data are only displayed if Data is selected for Display mode pg 282 while the RGB histogram page is only displayed if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo was taken NIKON D3 LATITUDE IN j lt 35 35 971 LONGITUDE E 139 43 696 LTITUDE 35m ALTITUI TIME UTC 15 12 2007 P 1 125 F5 6 3200 85mm 5 56 MBAUTO 0 O AdobeRGB ESD 8 100NC_D3 DSC 0001 JPG NORMAL H 100NC_D3 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 12 2007 10 16 00 4256x2832 15 12 2007 10 16 00 4256x2832 Overview Data GPS Data
265. s With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster Some lenses can not be used see page 380 Range of rotation for Al 80 200mm f 2 8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body Filters can not be exchanged while Al 200 400mm f 4 ED is mounted on camera If maximum aperture is specified using Non CPU lens data pg 220 aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and top control panel Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data pg 220 Use spot or center weighted metering if desired results are not achieved For improved precision specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non CPU lens data pg 220 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than 1 125 s If maximum aperture is specified using Non CPU lens data pg 220 aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and top control panel Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock or shifting lens In manual exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens Exposure compensation required when used with Al 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 105mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 135mm f 3 5 4 5 or AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D See teleconverter manual for details Requires PK 12 or PK 13 auto extension ring PB 6D may be required depending on camera orientation Use
266. s for exposure cntrl pg 313 For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed see Custom Setting e6 Bracketing order pg 329 136 4 Framea photograph focus and 7 shoot The camera will vary exposure and or flash level shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation see page 132 making it possible to achieve exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV While bracketing is in effect a bracketing P progress indicator will be displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot ENA custom Y aA EA Exposure increment Exposure increment Exposure increment OEV 1 EV 1 EV 137 138 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero 4 and is no longer displayed in the control panel on top of the camera The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset pg 206 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated Exposure and Flash Bracketing In single frame and self timer modes one shot will be taken each time the shutt
267. s or other compositions that emphasize the main subject Small aperture f 36 Large aperture f 2 8 Aperture can be locked at the selected setting see page 128 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot Non CPU Lenses If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non CPU lens data item in setup menu pg 220 when a non CPU lens is attached the current f number will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel rounded to the nearest full stop Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops 4F with maximum aperture displayed as AFG and the f number must be read from the lens aperture ring 123 124 M Manual In manual exposure mode you control both shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in manual exposure mode 1 Select exposure MODE button mode M Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until M is displayed in the viewfinder and top Main command dial control panel Choose aperture and shutter speed Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub command dial to set aperture Shutter speed can be set to x 250 the flash sync speed limit or to values between 30 s and g 000 s or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time exposure tus amp ty Pg 126 Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens Check exposure in the
268. scribed for Show previous Rotate Tall Choose whether to rotate tall portrait orientation pictures for display in the camera monitor Option Description Tall portrait orientation pictures are automatically On rotated for display in the camera monitor Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation pg 349 will be displayed in wide landscape orientation Off Tall portrait orientation pictures are displayed in default wide landscape orientation 287 288 Slide Show Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder pg 281 Hidden images pg 281 are not displayed Option Description Start Start slide show Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed Audio playback Display menu of voice memo playback options pg 289 To start the slide show highlight Start and press The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress To Press Description Skip back skip Press lt to return to previous frame gt to skip ahead to next frame View additional lt photo info O Change photo info displayed pg 231 Pause slide show see following page Voice Pause slide show memo playback may continue after amp button has been pressed oe Poea MENU End slide show and return to playback menu Exit to playback c
269. se Simplified and Traditional Dutch English Finnish French German Italian Japanese Korean Polish Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish Power source Battery One rechargeable Li ion EN EL4a battery AC adapter EH 6 AC adapter available separately Tripod socket Tripod socket 1 4 in ISO 1222 Dimensions weight Dimensions WxHxD Approx 159 5 x 157 x 87 5 mm 6 3 x 6 2 x 3 4 in Weight Approx 1240 g 2 7 Ib without battery memory card body cap or accessory shoe cover Operating environment Temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Humidity Less than 85 no condensation e Unless otherwise stated all figures are for a camera with a fully charged battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 C 68 F e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain 432 Calibrating Batteries The MH 22 quick charger is equipped with a battery calibration feature Calibrate the battery as required to ensure the accuracy of the camera and charger battery level displays If the calibration lamp for the current battery chamber blinks when a battery is inserted the battery needs to be calibrated To begin calibration press the calibration button for the current cham
270. se circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry To prevent an accidental interruption of power avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected Dry the accessory shoe cover If the camera is used in the rain water may penetrate the supplied BS 2 accessory shoe cover Remove and dry the accessory shoe cover after using the camera in the rain Notes on the monitor The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction Images recorded with the product are unaffected Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light Do not apply pressure to the monitor as this could cause damage or malfunction Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth Batteries Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning and should be removed with a soft dry cloth before use Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries Turn the product off before replacing the battery The batter
271. ses Autofocus 73 How do take a lot of photographs Release made 86 quickly Can change the frame advance rate Shooting speed 88 320 Can shoot a self portrait Self timer mode 103 Can take pictures under low light Sa without the flash ISO sensitivity 108 Can the ISO sensitivity choose be ISO sensitivity auto 110 adjusted to ensure optimal exposure control How do freeze or blur moving objects Exposure mode 7 120 shutter priority auto How do blur background details or keep ee f both foreground and background in P 122 focus aperture priority auto Question Key phrase See page Can I set both shutter speed and aperture Exposure mode M 124 manually manual Can make photos brighter or darker Exposure compensation 132 How do I make a time exposure Long time exposures 126 Can vary exposure or flash level Exposure and flash f A 135 327 automatically over a series of photos bracketing Can I create multiple copies ofa photo White balance 139 327 using different white balance settings bracketing How do adjust white balance White balance 144 How do change settings for the optional Fisshimod 197 flash unit How can record multiple shots as a Multiple exposure 208 single photograph Can I record voice memo when taking a Ysice memo 248 photograph Can pick the standard exposure level Fine tune op tinal 315 exposure How can r
272. ses on ___ subject in selected focus point only Use for relatively Single point n AF static compositions with subjects that will stay in selected focus point e In continuous servo AF pg 74 user selects focus point manually if subject briefly leaves selected focus point camera will focus based on information from surrounding points Number of focus points used can fs be selected from 9 21 and 51 using Custom Setting a3 Dynamic Dynamic AF area pg 306 If 51 points 3D tracking area AF is selected for Custom Setting a3 focus point will be selected automatically using 3D tracking e Insingle servo AF pg 74 user selects focus point manually camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point If type G or Dlens is used camera can distinguish human subjects C from background for improved Auto area AF P i25 Sb 200 I subject detection In single servo AF active focus points are highlighted for about one second after camera focuses Active focus points are not displayed in continuous servo AF AF Area Mode AF area mode is shown in the shooting information display when the E button is pressed EmA AFS GSMA REM 49 H S AF area mode indicator AF area mode Information display Single point AF Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area pg 306 9 points ESA de
273. ssed continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded see page 212 The icon will blink until shooting Ny ends When shooting ends multiple Pies 756 exposure mode will end and the AF S REM 2777 icon will no longer be displayed toon CG SYTt Repeat steps 1 7 to take additional multiple exposures vV Multiple Exposure Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure Live view pg 90 can not be used to record multiple exposures The information listed in the playback photo information display including date of recording and camera orientation is for the first shot in the multiple exposure If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point Voice Memos The camera stores only the last voice memo created during a multiple exposure Interval Timer Photography If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been taken the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is ignored These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph
274. sseeeeenee 313 b2 EV Steps for Exposure Ctrl sesssssssesssscsssecssseesseesseees 313 b3 EV Steps for Exposure Comp b4 Easy Exposure Compensation b5 Center Weighted Area 315 b6 Fine Tune Optimal EXPOSULe essssescccsseecessteceeneeeeeeee 315 Gr TIMErS AE LOCK ariiraa 317 c1 Shutter Release Button AE L uu eesssesscsssecessesseeseeceeneees 317 c2 Auto Meter off Delay essssscssssssccsecsssesscenecesneecenseees 317 c3 Self Timer Delay c4 Monitor off Delay Shooting Display iT BES EAEE TE d2 Shooting Speed uu sceessscsssesccsseecesseccessscessuecesnseessnseessnsees d3 Max Continuous Release d4 File Number Sequence sssssssssssssoessssssesssssssssoosrseeee 321 d5 Control Panel Viewfinder 322 d6 Shooting Info Display 323 d7 LCD Illumination 1 324 d8 Exposure Delay MOde sssssscssssccsssssccsssecesseeceseesssneees 324 XV xvi Bracketing FlAash essscssessssscsssesssccsssessecessesssceessesseseeneeesseene 325 e1 Flash SYNC SP ed w seesssssseccssessecsseesessteccsseceeessecssneesenseees 325 e2 Flash Shutter Speed sessssesssssessssscssecsssccssecssscsssesssseess 326 e3 Modeling Flash 326 e4 Auto Bracketing Set 327 e5 Auto Bracketing Mode M 328 e6 Bracketing Order sessssssecsssesscsseecessescccssecessseeccsneesenseees 329 Pe COMtrolsivsszecwdsctsiese
275. sseessssecseessseees 28 6 Focus selector IOC csssseesseees 78 7 Memory card access lamp 43 56 8 Memory card slot cover 42 9 Card slot cover release button under COVEN ssecssecssesssessesssesseesee 42 10 AF ON AF ON button for Vertical SHOOTING sesser 312 11 amp microphone button 249 12 AF area mode selector 76 13 Main command dial for Vertical SHOOTING ssseccseeeceeees 16 The Top Control Panel 1 11 2 12 3 LETIA 4 fas Ae T T ct be ott AF 5 SLOW REAR C REM da 13 maoe m E80 Laem ABCD oa 00K Oi A Gla E ERAGE 3 10 1 Shutter speed 120 124 Exposure compensation VANU E ssssninsiaisseninssseenscassnssciseosnstos 132 Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing SEqUEnNCe ssseessossooreorsssssssessnsssse 135 Number of shots in WB bracketing sequence 139 Number of intervals for interval timer photography 216 Focal length NON CPU lenses wc 222 ISO sensitivity 0 eesceeeeseeceseeeeee 108 2 Shutter speed lock icon 127 3 Flexible program indicator 119 4 Exposure MOE Q essesssseecseeeeees 116 5 Flash Mode sssssssssssssesssrrsssesssees 197 6 Shooting menu bank 291 7 Custom settings bank 303 8 Memory card indicator slot 1 ssceccossisccpssessessecssacesesaseoees 42 45 10 Number of exposures TEMAINING uu sessseesseessecscenseensecssenee 49 Number
276. ssesosssosoesoesesseeoesi Color temperature 23 Image area 2 White balance fine tuning 147 OM iiacesumenticstion Preset manual eesssseccseeecceeee 152 IN dICAtOTF oo seeeesssseeccsseccesneeccenseeeee 354 30 Color SPACE aa rrvnnnnerrrrnnn 187 25 Time Of recording usses 39 2 is displayed if DX format 24 x 16 was selected for the Image area option pg 60 in the shooting menu F441 if 5 4 30 x 24 was selected No icon is displayed when FX format 36 x 24 is selected Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback To display images in contact sheets of four or nine images press the M9 button and rotate the main command dial mm 100 1 saa 100 2 fl Full frame playback Thumbnail playback 241 The following operations can be performed while thumbnails are displayed To Description Change number of images displayed Press Q button and rotate main command to left to display one four or nine images per page Toggle full frame playback Press center of multi selector to switch back and forth between full frame and thumbnail playback Highlight images Use multi selector to highlight images for full frame playback playback zoom pg 243 or deletion pg 245 Page through images Press Q button and rotate sub command dial to scroll through images a page at a time De
277. ssosssessscscesesesseces pg 228 Photo Information secssscsesssscscsssesssscsssssececsceeees pg 231 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback pg 241 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM ss0000 pg 243 Protecting Photographs from Deletion pg 244 Deleting Individual Photograph scecsssseees pg 245 227 Full Frame Playback To play photographs back press the P button The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor Gl 100NC_D3 DSC_0010 JPG 22 12 2007 12 31 21 NORMAL 2 4256x2832 Multi selector Sub command dial T button gt button ER button O n button button a button Main command dial Rotate tall To display tall portrait orientation photographs in tall orientation select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu pg 287 i 100NC_D3 DSC_0009 JPG NORMAL 2 12 2007 12 31 00 4256x2832 i 2 228 To Description View Press to view photographs in order additional recorded lt to view photographs in photographs reverse order View photo Press A or to view information information about current photograph pg 231 View See page 241 for more information on thumbnails the thumbnail display J Zoom in on E See page 243 for more informa
278. sures remaining The top control panel shows the number of photographs that can be taken at current settings When this number reaches zero the number of exposures remaining frame count and pa eee icon will flash in the top control i LAIN panel and a flashing icon will appear in the viewfinder No further pictures can be taken until you delete pictures or insert a new memory card You may be able to take additional pictures at lower image quality or size settings Jays a Bias A Gn U Large Capacity Memory Cards When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a thousand or more pictures at current settings the number of exposures remaining will be shown in thousands rounded down to the nearest hundred e g if there is room for approximately 1 260 exposures the exposure count display will show 1 2 K AF Bia jA i Pa cusTow L LEK e 2s rss eoo eo 49 50 The Battery Indicator If the segments in the top control panel battery icon blink on and off the camera is calculating the battery charge The battery level will be displayed in about three seconds Auto Meter Off At default settings the shutter speed and aperture displays in the top control panel and viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds auto meter off reducing the drain on the battery Press the shutter release button halfway to reactivate the
279. t 2 71 Image quality 65 Image size 69 Image area 60 JPEG compression 67 NEF RAW recording 68 White balance 144 Set Picture Control 166 Manage Picture Control 174 Color space 187 Active D Lighting 185 Long exp NR 299 High ISO NR 299 ISO sensitivity settings 108 Live view 90 Multiple exposure 208 Interval timer shooting 213 290 Shooting Menu Bank Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks With the exceptions of Interval timer shooting and Multiple exposure changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described below Shooting Menu Bank The top control panel and shooting information displays show the current shooting menu bank EE Renaming Shooting Menu Banks Selecting Rename in the Shooting menu bank menu displays the list of shooting menu banks shown in Step 1 1 Select a ba
280. t be f 3 authorized service blinks blinks used 7 representative Camera clock is not set Set camera clock 39 blinks No lens attached or non CPU lens attached without specifying Aperture value will be AF maximum aperture displayed if maximum 220 Aperture shown in aperture is specified stops from maximum aperture gt lt Camera unable to focus blinks using autofocus Focus manually 3 409 410 Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page e Use a lower ISO 108 sensitivity e UseoptionalNDfilter 386 Subject too bright In exposure mode Hi photo will be 5 Increase shutter 120 overexposed speed A Choose a smaller 122 aperture larger f number Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page e Use a higher ISO 108 sensitivity e Use optional flash In 191 F s exposure mode tS RoSA ER Stowershiter 120 speed A Choose a larger 122 aperture smaller f number bulb bu thselect d in w aa 120 124 blinks exposure mode 5 i exposure mode Optional flash unit that 4 4 does not support i TTL eae a 194 N blinks flash control attached blinks and set to TTL Pasiunii If indicator blinks for 3s en proto E 5 after flash fires photo monitor i 194 blinks may be underexposed underexposed adjust settings and try again 411 Indicator Control
281. t control 3 to 1 m Test diopter adjustment lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved The DK 17C is equipped with a safety lock e Magnifying Eyepiece DK 17M The DK 17M magnifies the view Viewfinder through the viewfinder by approximately 1 2 x for greater eyepiece precision when framing accessories Right Angle Magnifying Viewing Attachment DR 5 Right Angle Viewing Attachment DR 4 The DR 5 and DR 4 attach to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting position The DR 5 can also magnify the view through the viewfinder by 2 x for greater precision when framing note that the edges of the frame will not be visible when the view is magnified e Eyepiece Adapter DK 18 The DK 18 is used when attaching the DG 2 Magnifier or DR 3 Right Angle Viewing Attachment to the D3 385 386 Filters e Nikon filters can be divided into three types screw in slip in and rear interchange Use Nikon filters filters manufactured by other makers may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding e The D3 can not be used with linear polarizing filters Use the C PL circular polarizing filter instead e The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens e To prevent moir use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light or when a bright light
282. tal SLR 196 mode 197 modeling 326 monitor pre flash 190 range 200 ready indicator 194 202 FV lock 201 331 G GPS 223 GPS 223 231 238 388 connecting 223 data 231 238 GPS data 238 sync speed 325 H sync terminal 204 HDMI 346 Flash shutter speed 326 HDMI 276 346 436 Flash sync speed 325 Help 31 flexible 119 HI 109 Fn button 64 201 331 f number 38 116 Focal length 220 Focal plane mark 84 Focus 74 Hide image 281 High definition 274 276 346 436 High ISO NR 299 Highlights 232 233 282 Histogram 233 282 440 autofocus 74 76 78 80 82 contrast detect 91 98 99 100 phase detection 91 100 electronic range finding 84 95 386 indicator 55 74 84 304 305 lock 80 82 311 mode 74 304 305 continuous servo AF 74 304 manual 74 83 95 I Image area 60 63 5 4 30x24 61 Auto DX crop 60 63 Choose image area 61 63 FX format 36x24 61 Image area 38 60 69 297 Image authentication 354 Image comment 348 Image Dust Off 351 Image overlay 368 Image quality 65 Image quality 65 Image review 287 Image size 69 Image size 69 Index print 271 In focus indicator 55 74 84 304 305 Information 14 231 323 Interval timer shooting 213 Interval timer shooting 213 ISO sensitivity 108 ISO sensitivity auto control 110 Maximum sensitivity 110 Minimum shutter speed 110 ISO sensitivity s
283. ted check that the correct card is selected in the top control panel before proceeding To exit without formatting the memory card press any button other than the n MODE and t buttons For a 45 46 3 Press the buttons again Press the s MODE and tt buttons together a second time to format the memory card Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting When formatting is complete the top control panel will show the number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings and the frame count displays will show i Pi25 55 200 5 sHoor JN jf g CUSTOM fy Lik i No Memory Card If no memory card is inserted the top control panel and viewfinder will show If the camera is turned off with a charged EN EL4a battery and no memory card inserted will be displayed in the top control panel See Also EEEE Ce See page 345 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format memory card option in the setup menu Adjust Viewfinder Focus The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual differences in vision Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before shooting 1 Lift the diopter adjustment knob Remove the lens cap turn the camera on and pull the diopter adjustment knob out 2 Focus the viewfinder Rotate the diopter adjustment knob until the v
284. ter and dry thoroughly Important Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty These glass elements are easily damaged Remove dust and Lens lint with a blower If using an aerosol blower keep the can mirror and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid To remove viewfinder fingerprints and other stains apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care Remove dust and lint with a blower When removing fingerprints and other stains wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Do not apply pressure as this could result in damage or malfunction Monitor Do not use alcohol thinner or other volatile chemicals Replacing the Focusing Screen A type B clear matte VI focusing screen is inserted in the camera at shipment To insert an optional type E clear matte VI focusing screen for D3 cameras pg 384 1 Remove the lens Turn the camera off and remove the lens 2 Unlatch the screen holder Using the tweezers supplied with the focusing screen pull the focusing screen latch towards you The screen holder will spring open 3 Remove the existing screen Remove the existing screen using the supplied tweezers and being careful to handle the screen by the tab to avoid scratches 4 insert the replacement screen Using the tweezers and handling the screen by the tab set the replacement scr
285. tery chamber Slide the clock battery chamber cover towards the back of the main battery chamber until it clicks into place 6 Replace the main battery Reinsert the EN EL4a 7 Set the camera clock By World time e Timezone Set the camera to the current dateand Piere time pg 39 Until the date and time annenin have been set the icon willflashin P a the top control panel ei eia vV Inserting the Clock Battery Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation Inserting the battery incorrectly could not only prevent the clock from functioning but could damage the camera 394 The Low Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera s picture element is fitted with a low pass filter to prevent moir If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs you can clean the filter as described below Note however that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon authorized service personnel 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low pass filter If the battery level is below 2a 60 turn the camera off and insert a fully charged EN EL4a battery or connect an optional EH 6 AC adapter 2 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning mar Remove the lens and turn the camera on Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in the se
286. the camera measure from the focal plane mark 6 on the camera body The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46 5 mm 1 83 in Focal plane mark Release Mode Single Frame Continuous Live View Self Timer or Mirror Up Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs one at a time in a continuous sequence with the view through the lens displayed in the monitor with a timed shutter release delay fa or with the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize vibration Choosing a Release MOd cscscecscscscscscscssssceccenes pg 86 Continuous Modenie eena eese eener pg 88 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View pg 90 Self Timer Mode facscscssessccectcessscccecrstscczcccsessescesecseseess pg 103 Mirror p MOdEi s ses eecseececseeeeteeesecresestesecererses ceres ecteesee pg 105 85 fy 86 Choosing a Release Mode The camera supports the following release modes Mode Description S Camera takes one photograph each time shutter release Single frame button is pressed S While shutter release button is held down 1 9 frames per Continuous second low speed CH While shutter release button is held down camera records Continuous up to 9 frames per second 9 11 fps when DX format high speed 24 x 16 is selected for Image area see page 60 Frame pictures in monitor pg
287. the final composition It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus pg 82 1 Focus Position the subject in the selected focus J N point and press the shutter release button halfway to initiate focus 2 Check that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder Single servo AF Focus will lock automatically when the in focus indicator appears and remain locked until you remove your finger J y jj 7 from the shutter release button Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE L AF L button see following page Continuous servo AF Shutter release Press the AE L AF L button to lock both button focus and exposure an AE L icon appears in the viewfinder see page 129 Focus and exposure will remain locked while the AE L AF L button is pressed even if you later remove your finger from the shutter release button 3 Recompose the photograph and shoot Focus will remain locked between shots as long as the ay shutter release button is kept pressed halfway allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting Focus will also remain locked between shots while the AE L AF L button is pressed Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect If the subject moves focus again at the new distance See Also For information on choosing the role pl
288. the way down The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor instead of the viewfinder for improved focus pause briefly with the shutter release button pressed halfway before pressing it the rest of the way down To exit without taking a picture rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press MENU 3 Framea picture in the monitor To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 x press the HQ button while rotating the main command dial p ER button Main command dial m While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll within the AF area brackets 4 Focus Autofocus focus mode S or C z Press the shutter release H button halfway or press an t AF ON button The camera will focus normally and set exposure Note that the mirror will click back into place while either button is pressed temporarily interrupting live view Live view is restored when the button is released The focus point can be selected using the multi selector Manual focus focus mode M pg 83 Focus using the lens focusing ring The focus point for electronic range finding can be selected using the multi selector 95 m 96 5 Take the picture 4 Press the shutter release
289. tical shutter release button lock 335 Video 274 346 Video mode 346 Viewfinder xviii 6 7 12 47 384 385 402 eyepiece 47 103 215 384 385 focus 47 ViewNX 167 348 Virtual horizon 357 Virtual horizon 333 357 Voice memo 248 349 Voice memo 229 246 247 254 Voice memo button 249 350 Voice memo overwrite 249 350 w WB 6 150 White balance 144 Auto 144 Choose color temp 145 Cloudy 145 Direct sunlight 144 Flash 145 Fluorescent 144 443 444 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets Incandescent 144 Preset manual 145 Shade 145 White balance 143 bracketing 134 139 preset manual 145 152 Wireless 191 261 262 354 383 network 261 transmitter 261 354 Wireless transmitter 354 World time 347 Date and time 347 Date format 347 Daylight saving time 347 Time zone 347 WT 4 261 262 354 383 Nikon No reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION CE NIKON CORPORATION Printed in Japan Fuji Bldg 2 3 Marunouchi 3 chome SB7J01 11 Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 8331 Japan 6MB00711 01
290. ting is on pg 425 Use matrix metering pg 114 Although exposure is in fact reduced to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows highlights underexposed areas and mid tones are automatically adjusted to prevent the resulting photograph from being underexposed The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings pg 171 can not be adjusted while active D lighting is in effect Noise distortion or banding may be visible at high ISO sensitivities Note that Active D Lighting is not available with sensitivities of HI 0 3 or higher M Active D Lighting versus D Lighting The Active D Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range while the D Lighting option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting Color Space The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the camera Option Description Choose for photographs that will be printed or used as is with no further modification This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than sRGB making it the preferred choice for images that will be extensively processed or retouched sRGB sRGB default Adobe Adobe RGB 1 Select Color space SHOOTING MENU cy PEG compression ij Highlight Color space in the Wte balan
291. tion see the documentation provided with the application or device Nikon Software ViewNxX supplied and Capture NX available separately automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs created with the D3 Flash Photography Using Optional Flash Units This chapter describes how to use the camera with optional flash units that support the Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS pg 190 Compatible Flash Units scccscscsscesscersscersessreees pg 191 CLS Compatible Flash Units ssssssssssssssssesessetsseseesesseesassansassesses pg 191 ORERE A I e a R pg 194 iM Flash Contro eee eaa Ea eaae ntt pg 196 FlashMode Seara EEEa anren pg 197 AA EOE e A S AAA E pg 201 Elash Contacts ieteccessscstececsccssceseetsosstrsectvctectivasercesicetss pg 204 189 190 The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Nikon s advanced Creative Lighting System CLS offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography The Creative Lighting System supports the following features e i TTL flash control Improved through the lens TTL flash control for use with CLS see page 196 Flash level is set using monitor pre flashes to measure the light reflected by the subject ensuring that the level is adjusted appropriately for ambient lighting e Advanced Wireless Lighting Allows i TTL flash control with
292. tion and create a copy as described in the following table Note that red eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red eye check the preview thoroughly before proceeding Save To Use Description Press ma button Red eye correction Zoomin EQ fa and rotate main A command dial right to zoom in left to EY zoom out While Zoom out ES a photo is zoomed in press Q and use View other multi selector to view areas of image not areas of visible in monitor Keep multi selector image pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame While R button is pressed area Cancel currently visible in monitor is indicated by zoom yellow border Press to cancel zoom If the camera detects red eye in the Crente selected photograph a copy will be created on that has been processed to reduce its PY effects No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye 2 y 364 Trim Create a cropped copy of the selected 1342412280 JZ SAspect photograph The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow create a cropped copy as described in the following table AA ESScroll OKSave Cancel To Use Description Reduce size EY Press HS button and rotate main of ro E command dial right to reduce the size of P 7 the cr
293. tion on photograph l playback zoom pe Confirmation dialog will be displayed Delete images U Press fi again to delete photo pg 245 If voice memo has not been recorded Record pla voice memo will be recorded while amp i pay v button is pressed If voice memo has voice memo been recorded pressing button will start playback pg 248 Change To protect image or to remove protect On protection from protected image press status O n button pg 244 B View images If two memory cards are inserted on other choose memory card from which memory card pictures are played back pg 230 Return to shooting mode Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken immediately Display menus See page 277 for more information 229 230 Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu pg 287 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 20 s the default setting after shooting In single frame self timer and mirror up release modes photographs are displayed one at a time as they are taken In continuous release mode display begins when shooting ends with the first photograph in the current series displayed Two Memory Cards If two memory cards are inserted holding the HI button and pressing A in full frame or thumbnail Choose slot playback will display the menu shown at right Slot Highlight the desired slot and pres
294. to move the E NEF RAW recording item up or down in My Menu ey Asian FUNC button and press Repeat Steps 2 3 to reposition additional items i Move BOK Reordering Items in My Menu The item currently highlighted in My Menu can be moved up or down by pressing the Q button and pressing A or V Release the ES button when the operation is complete 376 Technical Notes Camera Care Options and Resources This chapter covers the following topics Compatible enseserccccccsccscsccececsecssecsessrencezscseceesersnees pg 378 OtherAccessoriessss ccccccacseccscsvsssssesssescscestessecstcusacss soeecs pg 383 Caring for the Camera csccscssscscsssesscesscsssecececseseeers pg 390 STOLAG LE riarticitarimtresecmmrcr N pg 390 GEE Tallis E oe erases areca ear T pg 390 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions pg 398 MNOUDIESHOOCING ccccecccesscesteccccerstccasessccecceeseesscs esiet Atea ses pg 402 Error MeSSAGES srcccccescecccoscesceesssateaccossessecnseacestasccessestecesess pg 409 AP DOMINIK A A L O AA pg 417 Specifications ttetetss tetst2trt ittero toteso tA tet eet ceseensecteoes pg 427 377 378 Compatible Lenses Camera setting Focus mode Ba Metering system 3 ey M Eales z Lens accessory 4 rangefinder el D ee Type G or D AF Nikkor _ 3 AF S AF I Nikkor K a Me a Ms Q PC Micro 85mm v ee 5 6 p 3 S f 2 8D4 x Sil a S AF S
295. tos pg Shooting Adjust shooting settings pg 290 Custom Settings Personalize camera settings pg 301 Setu Format memory cards and perform basic camera P setup pg 344 Create retouched copies of existing photographs K Retouch pg 360 My Menu Create a menu of custom options pg 373 27 28 Using Camera Menus up item Select BE Menu Controls The multi selector and button are used to navigate the menus Move cursor Select highlighted Cancel and return highlighted item gt to previous menu or display sub menu button Nide carsee Select highlighted down item BE Navigating the Menus Follow the steps below to navigate the menus 1 Display the menus MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight the icon for the current menu Press lt to highlight the icon for the current menu 4 o SHOOTING MENU P3 Shooting menu bank gt Reset shooting menu Y Active folder q File naming slot 2 TE Image quality Image size Image area 3 Select amenu Press A or to select the desired menu PLAYBACK MENU Delete Playback folder Hide image _ Display mode Copy image s Image review After delete Rotate tall 4 Position the cursor in the PLAYBACK MENU z fi selected menu Z Playback folder Hide image oe Displ d Press gt to position the c
296. transferred to a computer for printing or NEF RAW NEF processing Note that once transferred to a computer NEF RAW images can only be viewed using compatible software such as ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX available separately pg 387 Record uncompressed TIFF RGB images at a bit TIFF RGB TIFF depth of 8 bits per channel 24 bit color TIFF is RGB supported by a wide variety of imaging applications JPEG fine Record JPEG images ata compression ratio of roughly 1 4 fine image quality JPEG normal JPEG Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 8 normal image quality JPEG basic Record JPEG images ata compression ratio of roughly 1 16 basic image quality NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG fine and one fine quality JPEG image NEF RAW NEF Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG normal JPEG and one normal quality JPEG image NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG basic and one basic quality JPEG image Size priority File Size selected for JPEG compression See page 423 for information on the number of pictures that can be recorded at different image quality and size settings 65 66 Image quality is set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the Loe O rear control panel QUAL button Main command di
297. tup menu pg 344 and press gt note that this option is not available at battery levels of C or below 3 Press Lock mirror up for cleaning The message shown at right will be When shutter button is pressed displayed in the monitor and a row of E the mirror lifts and shutter opens Z A Sy To lower mirror turn camera off dashes will appear in the top control panel and viewfinder To restore normal operation without inspecting the low pass filter turn the camera off 395 396 4 Raise the mirror Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open revealing the low pass filter The display in the viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in the top control panel will blink 5 Examine the low pass filter Holding the camera so that light falls on the low pass filter examine the filter for dust or lint If no foreign objects are present proceed to Step 7 6 Clean the filter Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower Do not use a blower brush as the bristles could damage the filter Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon authorized service personnel Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter 7 Turn the camera off The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close Repla
298. tural colors under most types of lighting P Camera automatically adjusts shutter Exposure m d Programm speed and aperture for optimal exposure 116 ed auto in most situations Center Focus focus point point single point AF 78 Focus point Viewfinder focus point display is shown above Camera focuses on subject in center focus point when shutter release button is pressed halfway 51 52 2 Choose exposure mode F MODE button Exposure mode P is selected at shipment If another exposure mode is selected press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial to select exposure mode F The camera will automatically adjust shutter speed and Main command aperture for optimal exposure in most dial situations Choose single frame Release mode dial release mode lock release S single frame release mode is selected at shipment If another release mode has been selected hold the release mode dial lock release down and turn the release mode dial Release mode dial to S single frame At this setting the camera will take one photograph each time the shutter release button is pressed Choose single point AF AF area mode i 3 selector single point AF is selected at shipment If another AF area mode has been selected rotate the AF area mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to At this setting the user can choose
299. tures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval Shooting Menu Banks Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks pg 291 If shooting menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting menu item in the shooting menu pg 290 interval timer settings will be reset as follows e Choose start time Now e Interval 00 01 00 e Number of intervals 1 e Number of shots 1 e Start shooting Off 219 220 Non CPU Lenses By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using anon CPU lens If the focal length of the lens is known e Automatic power zoom can be used with SB 800 and SB 600 Speedlights available separately e Lens focal length is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display When the maximum aperture of the lens is known e The aperture value is displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder e Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture e Aperture is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens e Enables color matrix metering note that it may be necessary to use center weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses i
300. u bank option will be reset pg 291 Settings in all other banks are unaffected 418 BE Defaults Restored with Reset Shooting Menu pg 293 Option Default File naming pg 296 DSC Slot 2 pg 71 Overflow Image quality pg 65 JPEG normal Image size pg 69 Large Image area pg 60 Auto DX crop pg 60 On Choose image area pg 61 FX format 36 x 24 JPEG compression pg 67 Size priority NEF RAW recording pg 68 Type pg 68 Lossless compressed NEF RAW bit depth pg 68 12 bit White balance pg 144 Auto Fine tuning pg 147 Off Choose color temp pg 151 5000K Set Picture Control pg 166 Standard Color space pg 187 sRGB Active D Lighting pg 185 Off Long exp NR pg 299 Off High ISO NR pg 299 Normal ISO sensitivity settings pg 108 ISO sensitivity pg 108 200 ISO sensitivity auto control pg 110 Off Live view pg 90 Live view mode pg 91 Hand held Release mode pg 92 Single frame Multiple exposure pg 208 Reset Interval timer shooting pg 213 Reset 3 1 With the exception of Multiple exposure and Interval timer shooting only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be reset 2 Applies to all banks Reset shooting menu can not be selected while shooting is in progress w 3 Applies to all banks Shooting en
301. uage and press Po It Italiano NI Nederlands PI Polski 39 40 4 Select World time SETUP MENU i e Format memory card LCD brightness i Select World time and press w Lock mirror up for cleaning gt 2 Video mode HDMI AUTO id Language En EJ Image comment OFF Set time zone E P Time zone z Date and ti A time zone selection dialog E stoma will be displayed Press lt or gt ieee to highlight the local time zone Raters the UTC field shows the ANa difference between the iy Time zone selected time zone and z irea casera S007 00 00 08 Coordinated Universal Time or UTC in hours and press Turn daylight saving time is World time Daylight saving time on or off Daylight saving time options will be displayed Daylight saving time is off by default if daylight saving time is in effect in the local time zone press A to highlight On and press Set the date and time gt World time Date and time The dialog shown at right will be displayed Press lt or gt to select an item A or VW to change Press when the clock is set to the current date and time 8 Set date format E World time Date format Press A or W to choose the r order in which the year month a h mame and day will be displayed and cael press 68 9 Exitto shooting mode Press the shutter release button halfway I to exit to shooting mode
302. ugh in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated White Balance Bracketing White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF RAW Selecting NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing White balance bracketing affects only color temperature the amber blue axis in the white balance fine tuning display pg 148 No adjustments are made on the green magenta axis In self timer mode pg 103 the number of copies specified in the white balance program will be created each time the shutter is released If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded White Balance Keeping Colors True The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light source The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light source with the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the shade direct sunlight or under incandescent lighting Unlike the film used in film cameras digital cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images according to the color of the light source This is known as white balance This chapter covers white balance settings White Balance OptionS sessssssesessssscosososescosososesessoso pg 144 Fine Tuning W
303. uitry Only Nikon brand electronic accessories including battery chargers batteries AC adapters and flash accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry The use of non Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty The use of third party rechargeable Li ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal Nikon Nik PYIN UOyIN uo shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating igniting rupturing or leaking For more information about Nikon brand accessories contact a local authorized Nikon dealer xxiii Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction Life Long Learning As part of Nikon s Life Long Learning commitment to ongoing product support and education continually updated information is available on line at the following sites e For users in the U S A http www nikonusa com e For users in Europe and Africa http www europe nikon com support e For users in Asia Oceania and the Middle East
304. ure Control Rename the Picture Control as described on page 176 E Rename TA I h amp 4 i 0123456789 lt gt 2 NBCDEFGHIJKL MNOPQRSTUVWXYZ OCursor lnput OOK 181 HE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Camera 1 Select Delete L Manage Picture Control Le In the Manage Picture Control sweleit menu highlight Delete and Betas fe Load save press P he 2 Select a Picture Control i Manage Picture Control 1 Delete i Highlight a custom Picture i D Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt 3 Select Yes Manage Picture Control 1 Delete Highlight Yes and press to i J Dale Pitre contra delete the selected Picture STANDARD 02 Control es i No Nikon Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera Standard Neutral Vivid and Monochrome can not be renamed or deleted 182 HE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Memory Card 1 Select Load save ey Manage Picture Control Le In the Manage Picture Control Saveledit menu highlight Load save eee and press gt ST Load save gt 2 2 Select Delete from card E Manage Picture Control Highlight Delete from card and press gt E Load save Copy to camera Delete from card Copy to card 183 3 Select a Picture Control F Manage Picture Control Delete from card 1101 STANDARD 02 Highlight a custom Picture ClO2NEUTRAL 02 Control sl
305. ure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications 234 BE Shooting Data Page 1 TR SPD AP LENS SCUONOUL 1 Voice memo icon 2 Protect status 3 Retouch indicator 4 Metering method Shutter speed 120 124 Aperture nsssssssossosssssosssssscce 122 124 5 Exposure Mode ssssssssesssssessss 116 ISO sensitivity 2 esses 108 6 Exposure compensation 132 Optimal exposure tuning gt 315 MTR SPD EXP MODE 1SO_ GA EXP TUNING FOCAL LENGTH AF VR FLASH MODE B amp 6 1 8000 F2 8 1 0 3 3 5 6 85mm 85 1 4 i C Optional TTL 1 3 4 SLOW 7 Focal length 8 Lens data 9 Focus mode Lens VR vibration reduction 4 10 Flash mode Flash compensation Commander mode gt 11 Camera name 12 Folder number frame 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 282 2 3 to a value other than zero for any metering method 4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached 5 6 Displayed only if optional flash unit SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 is used Displayed in yellow with image area icon if DX format
306. ure will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised 105 p 106 ISO Sensitivity Reacting Faster to Light ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed The higher the ISO sensitivity the less light needed to make an exposure allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures This chapter describes how to set ISO sensitivity manually and automatically Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually ssscseeee pg 108 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ssessssessossosossoscssoscescse pg 110 107 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 200 and ISO 6400 in steps equivalent to 1 3 EV Settings of from about 0 3 1 EV below ISO 200 and 0 3 2 EV above ISO 6400 are also available for special situations ISO sensitivity can be adjusted e by pressing the ISO button and K rotating the main command ey dial until the desired setting is O displayed in the control panels 7 or viewfinder ISO button Main command dial Pad rr eons Iso og Top control panel Rear control panel Viewfinder ISO sensitivity 6400 The ISO Sensitivity Menu ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity option in the shooting menu pg 290 108 ISO Sensitivity Settings The settings available depend on the option selected for Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitiv
307. ursor A E in the selected menu S erste E Rotate tall 5 Highlight a menu item m PLAYBACK MENU s Delete j Playback fold NcD3 Press A or to highlight a Hide mace Display mode menu item EA Copy image s g OFF After delete T Rotate tall OFF 6 Display options ma mage review Press gt to display options for the selected menu item 7 Highlight an option Press A or to highlight an option 29 30 8 select the highlighted item Press to select the highlighted item To exit without making a selection press the MENU button button PLAYBACK MENU Delete fi w Playback folder NCD3 Hide image Ni __ Display mode Copy image s z is ON After delete T Rotate tall OFF Note the following points e Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available e While pressing or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect as pressing there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing e To exit the menus and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway pg 56 Help If a icon is displayed at the bottom left a SHOOTING MENU j j Col corner of the monitor help can be displayed A C aae ng by pressing the O n button A y Long exp NR a i High ISO NR description of the currently selected option PERUA livevi or menu will be displayed while the button u
308. us of images also apply to any voice memos that may have been recorded with the images Voice memo overwrite status can not be set separately Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback folder menu press the O n and i buttons together for about two seconds 244 Deleting Individual Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full frame playback or the photograph highlighted in the thumbnail list press the t button Once deleted photographs can not be recovered 1 Select an image Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the T button A confirmation dialog will be aE displayed Yes FEN i Delete 2 Yes 100 3 100 4 Thumbnail playback v To delete the photograph press the t st button again To exit without deleting YG V the photograph press the P button PD 245 246 Voice Memos If a voice memo has been recorded with the selected image the confirmation dialog shown Delete at right will be displayed when the tt button is pressed EN Dancel Sound only e Image sound Select this option and press the i button to delete both photo and voice memo e Sound only Select this option and press the t button to delete only the voice memo To exit without deleting either voice memo or photo press lt or gt See Also To delete multiple images
309. use the Delete option in the playback menu pg 281 The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted pg 287 Voice Memos Recording and Playback The camera is equipped with a built in microphone allowing voice memos to be added to photographs Voice memos can be played back over the camera s built in speaker Recording Voice Memos cssssecsscsesscecssssscececeeees pg 248 Playing Voice M MO6 ssccesssececsesesssececseseccssecseees pg 253 247 Recording Voice Memos Voice memos up to sixty seconds long can be added to photographs using the built in microphone Readying the Camera for Recording Before recording voice memos choose the desired options for the Voice memo pg 248 Voice memo overwrite pg 249 and Voice memo button pg 249 options in the setup menu HE Voice Memo This option controls whether voice memos E Voice memo are recorded automatically or manually The iE following options are available Y TT E amp 5s On Auto and manual fe WY Manual only Option Description amp Off default Voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode Selecting this option displays PEMA menu shown at right select On Auto and manual maximum recording time q fs 10s from 5 default 10 20 30 45 E ee On or 60s Unless On is oe 5s WGs 60 s 5s Aut
310. utput option in the setup menu BRIE controls whether voice memos are played back over the camera s built in speaker or by KAri see y E Avot HDMI audio vid tput a device to which the camera is connected Pout via an HDMI or audio video cable When sound is played back over the built in speaker the Audio output option also controls playback volume Option Description Voice memos are played i Audio output back over built in speaker K Selecting this option t a i t Via speaker displays menu shown at 3 E q right Press A or W to default z 1 5 change volume Beep will sound when option is selected Press to make selection and return to setup menu AVOUT HDMI audio Audio signal output to HDMI or A V OUT terminal video output Voice memos are not played back icon is X Off displayed when photo for which voice memo exists is viewed in monitor Connections Connecting to External Devices This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer how to print pictures and how to view them on a television set Connecting tO a COMPUTED ssesesessssssososesssessososesessososo pg 256 Direct USB CONNECCION eaae reena a EAA S EEES pg 258 Wireless and Ethernet Networks sssssssssssssssssssssseescsssessssseesee pg 261 Printing PhotographS seessssescossoscssoscsccscsscseseessosessos pg 262 Direct USB CONnMectiONs eee eenen aaea RERE pg 263 Viewing Photographs on TV
311. vate or cancel bracketing select number of shots in bracketing sequence pp 135 138 BKT button Main command dial Top control panel Select bracketing exposure increment pg 136 BKT button HE White Balance Press the WB button and rotate the command dials Sub command dial Top control panel Choose a white balance setting pg 145 Main command dial Rear control panel Fine tune white balance pg 150 set color temperature pg 151 or choose a white balance preset pg 162 WE WB button Sub a dial gt Ga en A Rear control panel Bl Flash Settings Press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial Choose flash mode pg 199 5 button Main command dial Top control panel The Fn Button Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting f4 Assign FUNC button pg 331 the Fn button and command dials can be used to select shutter speed and aperture in steps of 1 EV choose pre specified lens data for non CPU lenses or select the focus point The Depth of Field Preview and AE L AF L Buttons Depending on the options selected for Custom Settings f5 Assign preview button pg 337 and f6 Assign AE L AF L button pg 338 the depth of field preview and AE L AF L buttons can be used with the co
312. white to black to maintain contrast with the background To always use the same color lettering select Manual and choose Dark on light B black lettering or Light on dark W white lettering Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color B_ S8 S Em A AF S am fl S47 D Dark on light Light on dark 323 324 d7 LCD Illumination At the default setting of Off the control panel backlights LCD illuminator will only light while the power switch is in the 8 position If On is selected the control panels will be illuminated while the exposure meters are active pg 50 Select Off for increased battery life d8 Exposure Delay Mode At the default setting of Off shutter is released when the shutter release button is pressed When shooting with Tripod selected in live view mode pg 97 or in situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures On can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter release button is pressed and the mirror is raised e Bracketing Flash e1 Flash Sync Speed This option controls flash sync speed Option Description Auto FP high speed sync is used with SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units If other flash units are used shutter speed is set to 250s When the camera shows a shutter speed of 250 s in exposure mode F or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if t
313. will automatically be set to values between 1 250 and 1 60 s s 000 to 1 60 s with Auto FP sync High Speed Sync Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to ke capture both subject and background at night or under LOW dim light This mode is only available in exposure modes Slow sync P and A Tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake ta REAR Rear curtain In exposure modes S and M flash fires just before the shutter closes Use to create effect of a stream of light behind moving objects In exposure modes F and A slow rear curtain sync is used to capture both subject and background Tripod is recommended to prevent sync blurring caused by camera shake In this mode available only with SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 red eye reduction pre flash lights for approximately one g second before main flash Pupils in subject s eyes to contract reducing red eye effect sometimes caused by flash Owing Red eye to one second shutter release delay this mode is not reduction recommended with moving subjects or in other situations in which quick shutter response is required Avoid moving camera while red eye reduction pre flash is lit 197 198 Flash mode Description Red eye reduction with slow sync shake Combines red eye reduction with slow sync Use for portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery Available only in exposure modes F and A Trip
314. xxxnnnn is a file name copied from the image with which the voice memo is associated For example the voice memo for the image DSC_0002 JPG would have the file name DSC_0002 WAV Voice memo file names can be viewed on a computer 252 Playing Voice Memos Voice memos can be played back over the camera s built in speaker when the associated image is viewed in full frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list pp 228 242 The presence of a voice Ay Gl 100NC_D3 DSC_0001 JPG 15 6 00 memo is indicated by an N icon amo NORMAL 4256x2832 To Press Description Press to start playback Playback will end when Start end h button is pressed again or entire memo has been playback played back Confirmation dialog will be displayed Press A or to highlight option press t to select Deane Delete Delete Image sound Image sound Delete both Sound only Delete voice 1 photo and voice memo memo e Sound only Delete voice memo only To exit without deleting image or voice memo press the P button e Interrupting Playback Playback will end automatically if e The MENU button is pressed to display the menus e The monitor is turned off by pressing the P button or by pressing the shutter release button halfway e The camera is turned off e Another image is selected 253 254 Voice Memo Playback Options The Audio o
315. y Remove Hardware icon E in the taskbar and select Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device from the menu that appears Safely Remove Hardware 10 00 AM Windows 2000 Professional Click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon 5 in the taskbar and select Stop USB Mass Storage Device from the menu that appears MacOSX Drag the camera volume NIKON D3 into the Trash Unplug or Eject Hardware S 10 00 am NIKON D3 Wireless and Ethernet Networks If the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter is attached photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 available separately The WT 4 can be used in any of the following modes Mode Function Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp server Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before select mode upload Control camera from computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network computer Transfer mode PC mode Print mode For more information see the WT 4 user s manual M uss Select MTP PTP for the camera USB option pg 257 before connecting a WT 4 wireless transmitter A WT 4A B C D E The principal difference between the WT 4 and WT 4A B C D E is in the number of channels supported unless otherwise stated
316. y drop in charging life the charging life display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher 353 354 Wireless Transmitter This option is used to adjust settings for connection to a wireless network using an optional WT 4 wireless transmitter See Connections Wireless and Ethernet Networks pg 261 Image Authentication Choose whether to embed image authentication information in new photographs as they are taken allowing alterations to be detected using Nikon s optional Image Authentication software Image authentication information can not be embedded in existing photographs Photographs taken with image authentication on are marked with a f icon on the file information and overview data pages of the photo information display pp 232 240 Option Description Image authentication information embedded in new on photographs as they are taken Off Image authentication information not embedded in new default photographs I Camera Control Pro 2 Image authentication information is not embedded in TIFF RGB photographs recorded directly to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Copies Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created using the options in the retouch menu pg 360 Save Load Settings Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory card i
317. y in landscape photographs Orange produces more Red contrast than yellow red more contrast than orange A D o lt Green Softens skin tones Can be used for portraits Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters Toning Monochrome Only Pressing W when Toning is selected displays SS Monochrome saturation options Press lt or gt to adjust sharpening saturation Saturation control is not available when B amp W black and white is selected Filter effects E ZE Cyanotype 4 zj EA GQAGrid WOK Reset Custom Picture Controls The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based 173 174 Creating Custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls 1 Select Manage Picture Control 5 In the shooting menu pg 290 a highlight Manage Picture 3 Control and press gt 2 SHOOTING MENU JPEG compression 7 NEF RAW recording 8 White balance AUTO Set Picture Control ED Color space SRGB Active D Lighting OFF Long exp NR OFF 2 Select Save edit gt Le Y a fe Highlight Save edit and press gt Manage Picture Control Load save 3 Select a Picture Control Highlight an existing Picture Control and press P
318. y may become hot when used for extended periods Observe due caution when handling the battery Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat After removing the battery from the camera be sure to replace the terminal cover Charge the battery before use When taking photographs on important occasions ready a spare EN EL4a EN EL4 battery and keep it fully charged Depending on your location it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice On cold days the capacity of batteries tends to decrease Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary Once warmed a cold battery may recover some of its charge Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance Used batteries are a valuable resource Please recycle used batteries in accord with local regulations 401 402 Troubleshooting If the camera fails to function as expected check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative Refer to the page numbers in the right most column for more information HE Display Problem Solution Page Adjust viewfinder focus or use 47 optional diopter adjustment lenses Viewfinder is out of focus Viewfinder is dark Insert a

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Philips MP3 player SA4RGA02PN  Datalogic CBX500  PROMAX-4 Manual  取扱説明書  26LT475CD  APM User Manual  取扱説明書  Owner`s Manual • Manuel de l`utilisateur • Manual del usuario  Whirlpool W10136155B Ice Maker User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file